JP5702351B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a movable member configured to be movable on the front side of a display device, and control means capable of controlling the operation of the movable member.

  Conventionally, a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine includes a gaming board having a display area for displaying a gaming area into which a gaming ball is thrown and a variable display game, and a game to a start opening provided in the gaming board. Based on the winning of the ball, the display device starts the variable display using a plurality of symbols, and controls the execution of a variable display game that generates a special game state (so-called big hit) advantageous to the player when these are stopped in a predetermined combination There is a thing provided with the control device which performs.

And in such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a movable accessory that can be moved in the left-right direction in front of the display device is provided, and the fourth area is provided in a plurality of areas on the display screen of the display device. There is a configuration in which a symbol is variably displayed and any of the fourth symbols can be visually recognized when the movable accessory is actuated and moves in front of the display device (for example, Patent Document 1).
In the gaming machine described in this patent document, a pair of movable accessories that can move in the left-right direction is provided in front of the display screen of the display device, and the movable accessory is moved from the left-right direction to the center. The upper end and the lower end of the movable accessory are brought into contact with each other so that a window portion is not formed in the center portion so that an image displayed on the display device behind the window portion can be seen. ing.

Japanese Patent No. 4668241

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured such that the movable accessory is moved from the left-right direction and is brought into contact with the center, but the image displayed on the display device and the movable accessory are arranged . There is a problem that it is not possible to produce a notice effect by interlocking with the game, and it is not possible to diversify the notice effect and enhance the effect of the dynamic display game .

The present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described problems, and enables a notice effect by interlocking an image displayed on a display device with a movable decorative member, and diversifies the notice effect so that a variable display game can be realized. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect .

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A plurality of movable decorative members configured to be movable on the front side of the display device and capable of forming one significant shape by gathering at least each predetermined portion in one place;
A covering member capable of covering the front of the gap generated between adjacent portions of each movable decorative member in a state where the predetermined portions of the plurality of movable decorative members are gathered in one place,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable decorative member and the operation of the covering member ,
The control means includes
A state in which the movable decorative members are gathered in the display device can be displayed by an image,
An image display in a state where the movable decorative members are gathered on the display device and a control for operating the inter-cover member can be interlocked .

Here, the “gap” includes not only a case where a gap is actually generated but also a portion where a gap is generated or not generated due to variations in parts and assembly.
According to the first aspect of the present invention, a plurality of movable decorations configured to be movable on the front side of the display device and capable of forming one significant shape by gathering at least each predetermined portion in one place. Since the members are provided, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable display game executed on the display device and to hide the gaps between the adjacent parts of the movable decorative members, so that a sense of unity is provided as an accessory and the decorativeness is enhanced. I can do it.

In addition to the notice effect by interlocking the movable decorative member and the covering member, the notice effect can be realized by interlocking the image displayed on the display device with the actual movable member. The production effect can be enhanced.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 ,
The movable decorative member is configured to be movable in parallel with the display screen of the display device,
The intermediate covering member is configured to be movable in an arc shape in the front-rear direction of the display device.
Here, “moving in an arc shape in the front-rear direction” includes both a case where the display device moves from the back to the front and a case where the display device moves from the front to the back.

According to the second aspect of the present invention, it is easier to avoid interference during the operation of the movable decorative member and the intermediate covering member than when the intermediate covering member is configured to be movable in parallel with the display screen of the display device. be able to. Further, the cover member can be moved from the rear to the front of the display device at a relatively short distance, and the drive mechanism of the cover member can be made compact. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the arc is moved from the rear to the front, the present invention can be applied to a model that does not have sufficient space above and below the display device as compared with the case of moving in the vertical direction.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2 ,
The display device can execute a variable display game that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner,
At least a changing display means capable of executing a changing display indicating that the changing display game is being executed is provided outside the display screen of the display device.
Here, the “design” means a symbol such as a number or alphabet, a picture, or the like.
According to the third aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent the design of the display device and the changing display means from being simultaneously hidden by the movable decorative member, and the player is executing the changing display game. You can know for sure.

According to the present invention, in addition to the notice effect by the interlocking of the movable decorative member and the covering member, the notice effect by the interlocking of the image displayed on the display device and the movable decorative member becomes possible, and the notice effect is diversified. The production effect of the variable display game can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view which shows the structural example of the game board in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the surrounding frame body of the game board shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the detail of the front surface structural member which comprises the surrounding frame body shown in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the back surface structural member which comprises the surrounding frame shown in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the frame production | presentation apparatus provided in the back surface structural member. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the frame production | presentation apparatus of the state which removed the lower part production unit and the side part production unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the ball path member and the lower cover member from the frame production | presentation apparatus. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the detailed structure of the 1st movable member right position detection part of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the intermediate member and the 1st movable member from the frame production | presentation apparatus. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the detailed structure of the 2nd movable member right position detection part of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is the front view which looked at the frame body direction device from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the upper plate of the movement unit from the frame production | presentation apparatus shown in FIG. It is a top view which shows the state which looked at the movement unit shown in FIG. 13 from upper direction. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the drive mechanism of the 2nd movable member which removed the 1st movable member and the 1st slide shaft, the 1st motor, the 1st belt, and the 1st pulley from the moving unit. It is the front view which looked at the drive mechanism of the 2nd movable member of Drawing 15 from the front. It is the top view which looked at the drive mechanism of the 2nd movable member shown by FIG. 16 from upper direction. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the 2nd movable member of a frame production | presentation apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 2nd movable member of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 2nd slider of the upper end part of a 2nd movable member. FIG. 21 is an enlarged perspective view illustrating a state where the second slider of FIG. 20 is assembled and the second slide shaft is inserted. It is a back surface enlarged view of the state where the lid member was removed from the 2nd slider. It is an expansion perspective view of the lower horizontal support part provided in the lower end part of the 2nd movable member. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the flat wiring cable withdraw | derived from the 1st movable member and the 2nd movable member, and a relay board | substrate. It is the front view and bottom view which show the relationship between a flat wiring cable and a relay board | substrate when a 1st movable member moves to the left side and a 2nd movable member moves to the right side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect which used the display apparatus and movable accessory apparatus (movable member) in embodiment. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 26 using a display device and a movable accessory device (movable member). It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the effect using the display apparatus and movable accessory apparatus (movable member) in embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the continuation of the production example of FIG. 28 using a display apparatus and a movable accessory apparatus (movable member). It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode of a change of the shape (contour) of the display area of the display apparatus before and after operating the movable accessory apparatus (movable member) in embodiment. It is a front view of the surrounding frame which shows the state of the structure of the display area of the display apparatus in embodiment, and the state which the auxiliary | assistant effect actor device (lateral movable member) act | operated. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect which used the display apparatus and movable accessory apparatus (movable member) in other embodiment. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 31 using the display device and the movable accessory device (movable member). It is the perspective view which shows the structure of the slider of the upper end part of the movable member in other embodiment, and the expanded sectional view of the principal part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the effect using the display apparatus and movable accessory apparatus (movable member) in embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of effect control using the display apparatus and movable accessory apparatus (movable member) in embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the continuation of the production | presentation control example of FIG. 36 using a display apparatus and a movable accessory apparatus (movable member). It is explanatory drawing which shows the continuation of the production | presentation control example of FIG. 37 using a display apparatus and a movable accessory apparatus (movable member). It is a schematic front view which shows the structural example of the game board and board | presentation apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the movable decoration member in the board | presentation effect apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing which shows the difference in the case where it provides in the case where a cover member is not provided in the board | presentation apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the board | presentation apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation control procedure of the movable decoration member in the control system of the board | presentation apparatus of 2nd Embodiment, and a space | interval covering member. It is a schematic side view which shows the structural example of the drive mechanism of the space | interval covering member in the board | presentation apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic front view which shows the modification of the board | presentation apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic front view which shows the 2nd Example of the board production apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the movable decoration member in the board | presentation apparatus based on 2nd Example of 2nd Embodiment. It is principal part explanatory drawing which shows the example of the front surface decoration member in 2nd Embodiment. It is principal part explanatory drawing which shows the other Example of the front surface decoration member in 2nd Embodiment. It is principal part explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the front surface decoration member in 2nd Embodiment. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the front decoration member of a modification. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the game state and operation state of the front decoration member of a modification. It is a schematic front view of the game board to which the 2nd modification of the front decoration member in 2nd Embodiment is applied. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the front decoration member in a 2nd modification. It is a schematic front view of the game board which shows the attachment possible range of the front decoration member in a 2nd modification. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 1st Example of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 57 is an enlarged front view showing different display forms for each model when the collective display device of FIG. 56 is used. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 2nd Example of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 59 is an enlarged front view showing different display forms for each model when the collective display device of FIG. 58 is used. It is an enlarged front view which shows the modification of the collective display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged front view which shows the other modification of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 3rd Example of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 63 is an enlarged front view showing different display forms for each model when the collective display device of FIG. 62 is used. FIG. 63 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a structure of a cover plate locking means in the collective display device of FIG. 62; It is an enlarged front view which shows the modification of the cover member of the collective display apparatus in 3rd Example. It is an enlarged front view which shows the other modification of 3rd Example. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 4th Example of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows how to connect the collective display apparatus and game control apparatus in 4th Example. It is a top view which shows how to connect the collective display apparatus and game control apparatus in 4th Example. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a fifth example of the collective display device in the second embodiment, and (B) is a segment selection example of three startup memories of special figure 1, special figure 2 and ordinary figure and they are full. It is a figure which shows the display at the time of tongue. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a relationship between display colors and contents of segments in the collective display device of FIG. It is an enlarged front view which shows the modification of the collective display apparatus which concerns on 5th Example. FIG. 73 is an enlarged front view showing a state where a screen of a sub display in the collective display device of FIG. 72 is switched. It is an enlarged front view which shows the other modification of the collective display apparatus which concerns on 5th Example. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 3rd modification of the collective display apparatus which concerns on 5th Example. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control apparatus of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the first half part of the main process performed by the game control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the second half part of the main process performed by the game control apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transposition pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball remaining number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an error check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2 (at the time end of time reduction). It is a figure explaining an upper university winning opening opening / closing pattern. It is a figure explaining a lower big prize opening opening / closing pattern. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 3 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15. On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  In addition, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. There are provided a tray ball outlet 22, a lower plate 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player turns the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to be played on the game area 32 (see FIG. 2). Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened is performed in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can do. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a prepaid card is discharged from a ball lending button 27 operated when a player receives a ball lending from a ball lending machine adjacent to the player, and a card unit of the ball lending machine. For this purpose, a discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, an enclosure frame 40 having an armor portion 40a at the top and a display device 41 at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the surrounding frame body 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the surrounding frame body 40. That is, the surrounding frame body 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 (broken line R), protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for game balls to jump from the surrounding game area 32. Yes.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display). In an area (display area R) in which an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. The On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

A normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided on the left side of the surrounding frame 40 in the game area 32. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the surrounding frame body 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the surrounding frame body 40.
.. Are provided with a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 76) for detecting a game ball won in each of the general winning openings 35.
In addition, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided below the surrounding frame body 40, and an inverted “C” is formed in the upper part immediately below the opening winning opening 36. An ordinary variable winning device (general power) 37 having a pair of movable members 37b, 37b that open and convert to a state in which a game ball can easily flow in and that has a second start winning opening is provided.

The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is normally held in a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state.
When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 76) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is awarded. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 and a second special variable winning device that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. (Big prize opening) 39.
The first special variable winning device 38 is disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. The first special variable prize-winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. As a result, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player).

That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door that is driven by a large winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 76) as a driving device, for example. By converting the winning opening from the closed state to the opened state, the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player.
In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 76) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the first special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 (winning area). Has been.
Below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 32a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

The second special variation winning device 39 is disposed on the upper left side of the surrounding frame body 40. The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing member 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left side. As a result, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player).
That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a big prize opening opened and closed by an opening / closing member 39c driven by a big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 76) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state, By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player.

In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 76) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the second special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 39 (winning area). Has been.
Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (for example, the lower right portion of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for executing a common figure variable display game triggered by winning a prize at one place.

  The collective display device 50 in this embodiment includes a first special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 1 display) and a first special figure fluctuation display game for a first special figure fluctuation display game, which are constituted by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 2 2nd special figure fluctuation display part for special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 display), a fluctuation display part for general figure fluctuation display game (general figure display) composed of LED lamps, and LED A memory display unit for informing the start memory number of each variable display game composed of lamps is provided. Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the out port 32 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is a payout control device. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 76), the front frame 12 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 76) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been struck in 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played.
In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50.
In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (a general map specifying result) is derived by winning the normal map change display game.

The usual map variation display game is executed by a variation display unit (common diagram display) provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general and normal symbols) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information is displayed by blinking this LED. The fluctuation display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.
Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, which is displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the normal map change display game results in the normal map specifying result, it becomes a hit of the normal map, and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is in a predetermined time (for example, if the normal map low probability state). The open state is opened for 0.3 seconds (0.8 seconds in the case of a normal high probability state). This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the random number value extracted at the time of detection of the passage to the universal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure indicator stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, the normal variation winning device 37 is driven by a built-in general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 76), so that the movable member 37b has a predetermined time (for example, 0.3% in the normal low-probability state). The game ball is converted into a state of being released only for 0.8 seconds in the case of the normal high probability state, and the winning of the game ball is allowed.

The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four).
In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted. Each area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display section (the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the surrounding frame body. Also on the display device 41 of 40, it is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 is based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof, the special figure 1 display (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display (variation display device). The first or second special figure variation display game is performed.
The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41 corresponding to each special figure variation display game. It has come to be.
As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state (so-called, Big hit state). Correspondingly, the display mode (stop result mode) of the display device 41 is also a special result mode. Therefore, the display device (image display device) 41 serves as an auxiliary game device capable of executing a predetermined auxiliary game (in this embodiment, a variable display game).

  For example, in the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, first, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers or the like is displayed in the left fluctuation display region (first special symbol) and the right fluctuation display region (second special display). In each of the symbols) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game by the stop result mode constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  Note that the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the special game variable display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the game machine 10 with the special map 1 display and the special map 2 display.

Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is supposed to be executed.
In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one.

On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. When the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory.
In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning award port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a. Includes a flow path switch (described later) in the warp flow path 604, a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact type magnetic proximity that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Further, the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the detailed structure of the surrounding frame (so-called center case) 40 will be described.
FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the surrounding frame body 40 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 3, the surrounding frame body 40 includes a back surface constituent member (control unit) 700 including a display device 41 and the like, a front surface constituent member (front side decoration unit) 600 attached to the front surface of the back surface constituent member 700, Consists of. The front component 600 is inserted into the opening 30A from the front side of the game board 30, and the back component 700 is inserted into the opening 30A from the rear of the game board 30, and the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 30A. The rear surface and a part of the front surface of the back surface component 700 are joined or engaged.

  That is, the gaming machine 10 is a gaming member (enclosure frame body) disposed on the gaming board 30 (specifically, the gaming board 30 main body constituted by a wooden plywood board, an acrylic board, or the like) in which the gaming area 32 is formed. 40 and a winning opening device (first special variable winning device 38, etc.)), and a control device (game control device 100) for controlling the game is disposed on the rear side of the game board 30. The game members (the surrounding frame body 40 and the prize opening device (the first special variation prize-winning device 38, etc.)) are attached to the game board 30 so as to close the opening formed in the game board 30.

FIG. 4 shows the detailed structure of the front structural member 600 of the surrounding frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the front structural member 600 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 4, the front structural member 600 of the surrounding frame has a frame shape in which an opening 600 </ b> A is formed, and after the game ball rolls on the lower portion of the front structural member 600, the surrounding frame A stage 601 is provided to flow down the body 40.
The stage 601 includes a partition member 602 that partitions the region where the game ball on the stage 601 rolls and the opening 600A of the front component member 600, and the game ball that rolls on the stage 601 on the surrounding frame 40. A guide channel 603 that can flow downward is provided.
The partition member 602 mainly includes a flange portion 602a disposed so as to face the upper surface of the stage 601 with an interval at which at least a game ball can roll, and a lower end of the lower surface of the flange portion 602a. And a back wall portion 602b disposed over the rear end portion of the upper surface.

  The guide channel 603 is provided from a substantially central portion of the front surface of the back wall portion 602b of the partition member 602 to a substantially central portion of the front surface of the stage 601, and inside the enclosure frame 40 (between the stage 601 and the flange portion 602a). And a portion of the front surface of the stage 601 that is above the start winning opening 36 (specifically, substantially at the center of the front surface of the stage 601) and outside the surrounding frame body 40. A flow path having a guide outlet 603b that opens and communicates between the guide inlet 603a and the guide outlet 603b. That is, the stage 601 encloses the game ball that has flowed into the guide introduction port 603a opened inside the surrounding frame body 40 via the guide outlet port 603b opened on the front surface of the surrounding frame body 40 by the guide channel 603. It is configured such that it can be guided directly above the start winning opening 36 outside the frame body 40.

The front component member 600 includes a warp channel 604 that can guide the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the surrounding frame body 40 on the left side of the front component member 600.
The warp flow path 604 is provided on the upper left side of the front structural member 600 and opens toward the outside of the surrounding frame body 40, and the warp channel 604 is provided on the lower left side of the front structural member 600 and inside the surrounding frame body 40. It is a flow path that has a warp outlet 604b that opens toward the stage (specifically, between the stage 601 and the flange 602a) and communicates the warp inlet 604a and the warp outlet 604b. That is, the front component member 600 causes the game ball that has flowed into the warp inlet 604a opened on the left side surface of the surrounding frame body 40 to pass through the warp outlet 604b opened inside the surrounding frame body 40 by the warp channel 604. It is comprised so that it can guide | invade on the stage 601 (ball rolling part) inside the surrounding frame 40. FIG.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 is arranged on the front opening recessed chamber-shaped enclosure frame 40 facing the game area 32 formed on the game board 30 and the portion of the game area 32 positioned below the enclosure frame 40. A winning opening (start winning opening 36), a stage 601 on which a game ball can roll, a warp channel 604 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the stage 601, and a stage 601 And a guide channel 603 capable of guiding the game ball rolling down to the bottom of the surrounding frame body 40 and guiding it directly above the winning opening (start winning port 36).

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, on the upper left side of the front structural member 600, a flange portion 600 b for attaching the surrounding frame body 40 to the main body of the game board 30 composed of a plywood board or the like, and a game ball are provided on the display device 41. An armor portion 600c and the like are provided for guiding to flow down the left side or the right side.
Further, the front component member 600 includes a second special variable winning device 39 on the upper left side of the front component member 600. Further, the front structural member 600 includes a light emission effect device 610 on the right side of the front structural member 600.

FIG. 5 shows an exploded perspective view of the back surface constituting member 700 constituting the surrounding frame body 40. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the back surface component 700 as viewed from the front surface side.
As shown in FIG. 5, the back surface component 700 mainly includes a control base member 710 having a frame shape in which an opening 710 a is formed, and a frame shape in which an opening 721 a is formed, and the opening of the control base member 710. The frame effect device 430 as a board effect device mounted in the part 710a and the display unit 730 mounted on the rear surface of the control base member 710 are configured.

The display unit 730 includes a display device 41 and a display control device 42 attached to the rear surface of the display device 41.
The display area of the display device 41 includes an opening 710a of the control base member 710, an opening of the frame body effect device 430 (specifically, an opening 721a of the effect base member 721 included in the frame body effect device 430), and It is visible from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the opening 600A (see FIG. 4) of the front structural member 600.

FIG. 6 shows a detailed structure of the frame effect production device 430. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the frame body effect device 430 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 6, the frame body effect device 430 mainly includes an effect base member 721 having a frame shape in which an opening 721 a is formed, and a ball passage member 723 attached to the left front portion of the effect base member 721. A display unit partition effect unit 440 that is mounted on the upper portion of the effect base member 721 and can partition the display unit (display region R) of the display device 41 exposed from the opening 721a of the effect base member 721, and the lower front portion And a side effect unit 900 attached to the front right part of the effect base member 721.

The ball passage member 723 communicates with the winning ball discharge port 39e (see FIG. 5) of the second special variable winning device 39 (or faces the winning ball discharge port 39e with an interval less than the diameter of the game ball). There is a winning ball introduction port 723a and a middle winning ball outlet port 723b that opens toward the left part of the lower effect unit 800, and the middle winning ball introduction port 723a communicates with the middle winning ball outlet port 723b. It is a flow path.
Further, a lower winning ball flow path 801 is provided on the left part of the lower effect unit 800. The lower prize winning ball flow path 801 communicates with the middle prize winning ball outlet 723b (or faces the middle prize winning ball outlet 723b with an interval less than the diameter of the game ball), and a surrounding frame. The lower winning ball outlet port 801b that opens toward the outside of the body 40 is a flow path that connects the lower winning ball inlet port 801a and the lower winning ball outlet port 801b.

That is, the back surface constituent member 700 is a game ball discharged to the outside of the front surface constituent member 600 by the ball passage member 723 and the lower winning ball flow path 801 through the winning ball discharge port 39e of the second special variable winning device 39. Is guided to the outside of the surrounding frame body 40 (the lower part on the back surface (rear surface) side of the game board 30) and discharged.
The display section partition effect unit 440 includes rod-shaped movable partition members 48A and 48B that are slidable in the left-right direction within the opening 721a of the effect base member 721, and movable partition members 48A and 48B that are provided above the effect base member 721. Partition member drive motors 441A and 441B capable of generating a drive force for sliding the drive. In the display section partition effect unit 440, the movable partition members 48A and 48B slide in the left-right direction, so that the display area R of the display device 41 is partitioned left and right, and the display area R of the display device 41 is not partitioned. , Can be converted to.
A side effect unit 900 is mounted on the right side of the effect base member 721 from the front side. The side effect unit 900 includes a movable arm 941, a movable decorative member 942 fixed to the tip of the movable arm 941, a drive unit 740 including a motor 741 for driving the movable arm 941, and the movable arm 941 is provided on the right side of the effect base member 721. The support shaft 943 is rotated in an arc shape.

Next, details of the display unit partition effect unit 440 will be described.
FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of frame rendering device 430 with lower rendering unit 800 and side rendering unit 900 removed.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the frame effect production device 430, the ball passage member 723 is arranged in the vertical direction outside the partition wall 434a on the left side of the mounting base member 434, and the side effect unit 900 on the right side. An effect unit motor 741 that constitutes a side effect unit driving unit 740 for driving is provided.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B described above are arranged so as to be displaced forward and backward, and the first movable partition member 48A is located in front of the second movable partition member 48B. The second movable partition member 48B is configured to be movable in the left-right direction behind the first movable partition member 48A, that is, to pass each other. An intermediate member 435 that functions as a spacer is provided between the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B.

A first motor 441A for moving the first movable partition member 48A and a second motor 441B for moving the second movable partition member 48B are provided on the upper surface of the display section partition effect unit 440. ing. As will be described in detail later, the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are suspended so as to be movable by a slide shaft disposed in the horizontal direction, and the driving force of the first motor 441A and the second motor 441B is as follows. Each belt is configured to be transmitted to the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B by a belt.
FIG. 8 shows a state where the ball passage member 723 and the lower cover member 433 are removed from the frame body effect device 430 shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 8, the lower end of the first movable partition member 48A is along the front surface of the middle member 435 below the mounting base member 434, and the lower end of the second movable partition member 48B is along the back surface of the middle member 435. Arranged to move.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, a boss portion 434b for fixing the ball passage member 723 is provided at a position to be a back portion of the ball passage member 723 (see FIG. 7) on the left side of the front surface of the mounting base member 434. Is provided. Further, a boss portion 435b for fixing the lower cover member 433 in parallel with an appropriate interval is provided on the front surface of the middle member 435 below the mounting base member 434, and the lower cover member is connected to the middle member 435. The lower end portion of the first movable partition member 48 </ b> A is movable in the gap with 433.
Further, the lower surface of the mounting base member 434 supplies power to the LED lamps drawn from the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B and provided on the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B. The accessory relay board 436 to which the wiring for connecting is connected is attached.

Further, a first partition member right position detection unit 437A for detecting that the first movable partition member 48A is moved to the rightmost side is provided at the front right end portion of the middle member 435. On the other hand, a first partition member left position detection unit 438A for detecting that the first movable partition member 48A is moved to the leftmost side is provided at the front left end portion of the middle member 435.
FIG. 9 shows the detailed structure of the first partition member right position detection unit 437A. As shown in FIG. 9, a lower horizontal support portion 481 extending in the left-right direction is fixed to the lower end of the first movable partition member 48 </ b> A, and the first partition member is attached to the right end of the lower horizontal support portion 481. A right position detection piece 481a is provided. In addition, a first partition member left position detection piece 481b is provided at the front left end portion of the lower horizontal support portion 481. On the other hand, a U-shaped transmissive photoelectric sensor 438A that sandwiches the first partition member right position detecting piece 481a from the front and the rear is provided at the right end of the front surface of the middle member 435.

  FIG. 10 shows a state in which the middle member 435 and the first movable partition member 48A are removed from the frame body effect device 430 shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 10, a boss portion 434 c for fixing the middle member 435 is provided on the lower front surface of the mounting base member 434. Further, a second partition member right position detector 438B for detecting that the second movable partition member 48B is moved to the rightmost side is provided on the lower right side of the front surface of the attachment base member 434. On the other hand, a second partition member left position detection unit 437B for detecting that the second movable partition member 48B is moved to the rightmost side is provided on the lower left side of the front surface of the mounting base member 434.

FIG. 11 shows a detailed structure of the second partition member right position detection unit 437B.
As shown in FIG. 11, a lower horizontal support portion 482 extending in the left-right direction is fixed to the lower end of the second movable partition member 48B, and a second partition member is attached to the left end of the lower horizontal support portion 482. A left position detection piece 482a is provided. Further, a second partition member right position detection piece 482b is provided at the right front end portion of the front surface of the lower horizontal support portion 482. On the other hand, a U-shaped transmission type photoelectric sensor 439B that sandwiches the second partition member left position detection piece 482a from the front and the rear is provided on the left side of the lower surface of the mounting base member 434.
The detection signals of the sensors of the detection units are input to a control device (production control board) on the back of the gaming machine.

FIG. 12 shows a front view of the frame effect device 430 shown in FIG. 7 as viewed from the front.
As shown in FIG. 12, the first movable partition member 48A is suspended so as to be movable in the left-right direction by a first slide shaft 442A disposed in the horizontal direction above the unit. Further, as described above, the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are arranged so as to be displaced forward and backward, and are at the same height position as the first slide shaft 442A and behind the first slide shaft 442A, A second slide shaft 442B (not visible in FIG. 12) is provided to suspend the second movable partition member 48B so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

A first slider 483A and a second slider having through holes that can be inserted through the first slide shaft 442A and the second slide shaft 442B, respectively, at the upper ends of the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B. Sliders 483B are provided.
Also, above the first slide shaft 442A and the second slide shaft 442B, there are a first belt 443A and a second belt 443B for moving the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B in the left-right direction, respectively. A first motor 441A for moving the first belt 443A and a second motor 441B for moving the second belt 443B are arranged in the horizontal direction on the upper plate 444 of the display unit partition effect unit 440. Is provided. The first belt 443A and the second belt 443B are arranged in a vertically shifted state to prevent interference with each other.

FIG. 13 shows a state where the upper plate 444 of the display unit partition effect unit 440 is removed from the frame effect device 430 shown in FIG. As can be seen from FIG. 13, between the right shaft support member 445A fixed to the upper right side of the mounting base member 434 and the left shaft support member 445B fixed to the upper left side of the mounting base member 434, The first slide shaft 442A and the second slide shaft 442B are supported in parallel with each other in a horizontal state.
Further, a first pulley 446A around which the first belt 443A is wound is formed on the upper surface of the first slider 483A, and a second pulley 446B around which the second belt 443B is wound on the upper surface of the second slider 483B. Each is mounted for rotation. On the other hand, a first buffer pulley 447A around which the first belt 443A is wound is mounted on the upper left side of the mounting base member 434 above the left shaft supporting member 445B and mounted above the right shaft supporting member 445A. A second buffer pulley 447B around which the second belt 443B is wound is rotatably attached to the upper right portion of the base member 434.

The rotational force of the first motor 441A is transmitted to the first pulley 446A via a pair of gears 448A, and the pulley drives the first belt 443A to move the first slider 483A. Further, the rotational force of the second motor 441B is transmitted to the second pulley 446B via a pair of gears 448B, and the pulley drives the second belt 443B to move the second slider 483B.
FIG. 14 shows a state in which the display section partition effect unit 440 shown in FIG. 13 is viewed from above. As can be seen from FIG. 14, the first buffer pulley 447A is rotatably supported by a pulley support arm 449A incorporating a compression spring. Although not shown, the first buffer pulley 447A is opposite to the pulley support arm 449A (the right end in FIG. 14). The fixed portion 449 a is fixed to the mounting base member 434. Similarly, the second buffer pulley 447B is rotatably supported by a pulley support arm 449B incorporating a compression spring. Although not shown, the second buffer pulley 447B is fixed on the opposite side (left end in FIG. 14) of the pulley support arm 449B. The portion 449b is fixed to the mounting base member 434.

  FIG. 15 shows the second movable partition member 48B from which the first movable partition member 48A and the first slide shaft 442A, the first motor 441A, the first belt 443A, and the first pulley 446A are removed from the display unit partition effect unit 440. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the drive mechanism, and FIG. 16 is a front view of the drive mechanism of the second movable partition member 48B of FIG. 15 as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 17 shows a plan view of the drive mechanism of the second movable partition member 48B shown in FIG. 16 as viewed from above.

FIG. 18 is an enlarged perspective view of the second movable partition member 48B.
As can be seen from FIG. 18, the second movable partition member 48B has a shape in which the center swells inward as a whole, and a second slider having a shaft insertion hole 483b that can be inserted into the second slide shaft 442B at the upper end. 483B is provided. A belt clamping portion 483C and a lid member 484 are provided on the inner end portion (right end in FIG. 18) of the second slider 483B so as to protrude upward and clamp the second belt 443B from the front and the rear. . Further, the lower horizontal support portion 482 is fixed to the lower end of the second movable partition member 48B, and the second partition member left position detection piece 482a is provided at the left end of the lower horizontal support portion 482, and the lower horizontal support portion A second partition member right position detection piece 482b is provided at the right front end portion of the front surface of 482.

FIG. 19 shows a perspective view of the second movable partition member 48B of FIG. 18 in an exploded state.
As shown in FIG. 19, the second movable partition member 48B includes a lid member 484 bonded to the back surface of the second slider 483B of the second movable partition member 48B, and a plurality of light emitting diodes LED mounted on the front surface. And an LED substrate 486 mounted on the back side of the main body, and a position detection member 487 that includes position detection pieces 482a and 482b and is engaged with the lower horizontal support part 482 at the lower end. The first movable partition member 48A is different from the second movable partition member 48B in that the first movable partition member 48A has a symmetrical shape and has the same structure. Therefore, the description of the structure of the first movable partition member 48A is omitted.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the second slider 483B at the upper end of the second movable partition member 48B is disassembled.
The second slider 483B is formed so that the back surface is open and the inside is hollow. As shown in FIG. 20, the second slider 483B is formed between the second slider 483B and the lid member 484 bonded to the back surface. Two sets of rollers 841a and 841b; 841c and 841d that are in contact with the second slide shaft 442B from above and below, and two sets of roller shafts 842a that rotatably support these rollers, respectively. 842b; 842c, 842d, and guide shafts 843a, 843b; 843c, 843d that come into contact with the second slide shaft 442B so as to be sandwiched from the front and rear are accommodated.

The end portions of the roller shafts 842a, 842b; 842c, 842d are engaged with the inner surface (front surface in FIG. 20) of the lid member 484A, thereby engaging the recesses 484a, 484b; 484c, 484d. Is formed. Further, on the inner surface (front surface in FIG. 20) of the lid member 484, two sets of shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d facing and positioned above and below the second slide shaft 442B protrude forward. Is formed.
FIG. 21 shows the rollers 841a, 841b; 841c, 841d and the roller shafts 842a, 842b; 842c, 842d, shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d and the relationship between the second slide shaft 442B are shown.

As shown in FIG. 21, the two sets of rollers 841a and 841b; 841c and 841d are engaged with the two sets of roller shafts 842a and 842b; Touching.
The second slide shaft 442B is inserted through the two sets of shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d, and the guide shafts 843a, 843c are brought into contact with the front end surfaces of the shaft joining pieces 845a, 845b; 845c, 845d. Are arranged in a vertical posture, and the guide shafts 843b and 843d are arranged in a vertical posture so as to come into contact with the inner side surfaces of the shaft joint pieces 845a and 845b; 845c and 845d, and sandwiched between the second slide shaft 442B from the front and rear. It has become.
By providing the structure as described above, the second slider 483B at the upper end of the second movable partition member 48B can stably move along the second slide shaft 442B. Further, the guide shafts 843a, 843c; 843b, 843d and the second slide shaft 442B are made of metal such as stainless steel, the rollers 841a, 841b; 841c, 841d are made of synthetic resin such as polyacetal, and the roller shafts 842a, 842b. ; 842c and 842d are formed of a metal such as stainless steel, respectively, so that there is an advantage that smooth sliding and rotation are possible and wear of the surrounding resin material can be prevented.

FIG. 22 shows an enlarged back view of the second slider 483B with the lid member 484 removed.
The second slider 483B is formed so as to be hollow inside, and as shown in FIG. 22, the two slider shafts 842a, 842b; 842c, 842d are disposed on the back side of the second slider 483B. Engagement recesses 486a, 486b; 486c, 486d are formed in which the front ends are engaged. In addition, guide shaft storage portions 487a and 487b in which the guide shafts 843a and 843c are stored in a vertical posture are provided at the left and right ends of the back surface of the second slider 483B, and in the vicinity thereof, the upper and lower sides of the guide shafts 843b and 843d. Guide shaft pressing convex portions 488a, 488b; 488c, 488d are formed on both end portions, which contact from the front side and press toward the lid member 484.
Furthermore, a belt engagement portion 483d having unevenness that can mesh with a plurality of teeth of the belt 443B is provided at the upper end of the belt clamping portion 483c provided so as to protrude from the upper surface of the second slider 483B. The first slider 483A is also different from the second slider 483B in that it has a symmetrical shape and has the same structure. Therefore, the description of the structure of the first slider 483A is omitted.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged perspective view of the lower horizontal support portion 482 provided at the lower end portion of the second movable partition member 48B.
23, the second partition member left position detection piece 482a is located at the left end of the lower horizontal support portion 482, and the second partition member right position is located at the front right end portion of the lower horizontal support portion 482. A detection piece 482b is provided. The position detection member 487 provided in the lower horizontal support portion 482 has a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a flat wiring cable 489B drawn from the upper LED board 486 is disposed along the vertical piece 487c. It is folded on the horizontal piece 487d to change its direction, and extends in the direction of the second partition member right position detection piece 482b along the horizontal piece 487d, and downward from the slit-like broken line lead portion 487e provided in the middle. It is configured to be pulled out. The position detection member 487 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 487f, and the position detection member 487 is fixed to the lower end portion of the second movable partition member 48B through the screw holes 487f with screws (not shown). It has become. The lower horizontal support portion 481 (see FIG. 9) of the lower end portion of the first movable partition member 48A has a similar structure.

24, the flat wiring cable 489B pulled out from the second movable partition member 48B, the flat wiring cable 489A pulled out from the first movable partition member 48A, and the lower portion of the mounting base member 434 (see FIG. 8) are fixed. The relationship with the accessory relay board 436 is shown.
Since the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B can move from the right side to the left side of the display device 41 or vice versa, the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are shown in FIG. The length is set so that the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are in a relaxed state when each is in the initial position. Further, the ends of the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are configured to be electrically connected to terminals on the board side on the lower surface side of the accessory relay board 436, respectively.

FIG. 25 shows the relationship between the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B and the accessory relay board 436 when the first movable partition member 48A moves to the left and the second movable partition member 48B moves to the right. . In this case, as shown in FIG. 25A, the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B overlap when viewed from the front. However, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are displaced forward and backward with the intermediate member 435 interposed therebetween, so that the first movable partition member 48A and the second movable partition member 48B are reversed. Even if it moves, the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B do not interfere with each other.
Moreover, since the tips of the flat wiring cables 489A and 489B are connected to the terminals on the board side on the lower surface side of the accessory relay board 436, even if the cables are deformed by moving so that the cables cross each other, the cables It is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the connecting portion of the cable, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a failure in which the connecting portion of the cable is disconnected due to repeated movement of the movable partition member.

Next, examples of effects and displays using the frame effect device 430 and the display device 41 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an example of display using the display device 41 will be described.
In the first display example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), a decorative special figure variation display game to be executed using a plurality of identification symbols such as numerals and alphabets is displayed at the center of the display area of the display device 41. In addition to securing an area, a special figure 1 start memory number display area SM11 for displaying the special figure 1 start memory number (hold number) and a special figure 2 start memory number (hold number) are displayed at the upper part of the display area. 2 Results of the special figure 1 variable display game in the same display form as the special figure 1 display 51 of the start display memory number display area SM12 and the collective display device 50 (see FIG. 2) provided at the lower right of the game board 30 And a region CG12 for displaying the results of the second special figure variation display game in the same display form as the special graphic 2 display 52. In addition, the result of the special figure variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed in the same display form at a position slightly above the special figure game display areas CG11 and CG12 above the display area. Special figure game display areas CG21 and CG22 are provided.

  As described above, by providing an area for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game at the upper part of the display area of the display device 41, the player can enjoy the effect displayed in the center of the display area while playing the right side of the game board 30. The result of the original special figure variation display game can be confirmed without moving the viewpoint to the collective display device 50 provided below. Further, by providing two sets of areas for displaying the results of the special figure variation display game as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 26B, the first movable member 48A moves and the special figure game display area CG21 and Even if the CG 22 is hidden, the other special figure game display areas CG11 and CG12 are visible from the front. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27A, even if the first movable member 48A moves and hides the special game display areas CG11 and CG12, the other special game display areas CG21 and CG22 are moved from the front. Visible. Therefore, the result of the original special figure variation display game can be visually recognized with certainty.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the first display example is characterized by changing the number of marks to be displayed at the bottom of the display area of the display device 41 in accordance with the number of start memories generated. 1 is provided with a special figure 1 starting memory number display area SM21 for displaying the starting memory number (holding number) and a special figure 2 starting memory number display area SM22 for displaying the special figure 2 starting memory number (holding number). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 27B, even if the first movable member 48A moves and hides the special figure start memory number display areas SM11 and SM12 in the upper display area, the start memory number in the lower display area. Since the display area SM21 is visible from the front, the starting memory number can be confirmed at any time. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27A, even if the first movable member 48A moves and hides the special figure start memory number display area SM22 at the bottom of the display area, the start memory number display at the top of the display area is displayed. Regions SM11 and SM12 are visible from the front.

Next, an example of effect using the frame effect device 430 will be described.
In the first effect example, during the execution of the variable display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 27B, the first movable member 48A is moved to the left, and the display area of the display device 41 is shifted to the center display area A0 and the right. The display is divided into the effect display area A1, and the special display variation display game is displayed in the center display area A1, while the character C1 is made to appear in the right effect display area A1 as shown in FIG. As in B), the character C1 produces an effect as if the first movable member 48A is moving.

  In the second effect example, during execution of the variable display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 28A, the first movable member 48A is moved to the left and the second movable member 48B is moved to the right. The display area 41 is divided into a center display area A0 and right effect display areas A1 and A2, and the center special display variable display game is displayed in the center display area A0, while the character C1 is displayed in the right effect display area A1. The character C2 appears in the left effect display area A2, and the character C1 moves as if the first movable member 48A is moved to the left as shown in FIG. 2. An effect is produced in which the central display area A0 disappears by moving the movable member 48B to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 29A, the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B further move and pass each other, and the central display area A0 displaying the special figure variation display game appears again, As shown in FIG. 29 (B), an effect is made such that the changing symbol stops.

As described above, the entertainment of the game can be enhanced by performing an effect in which the display contents of the display area of the display device 41 and the movement of the movable member of the frame effect device 430 are related.
Further, in the above embodiment, since the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B have the shapes in which the centers bulge inward, the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B. Before the operation starts, the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B operate as shown in FIG. 30A in which both sides of the display area of the display device 41 are narrowed. When moving to the opposite side, as shown in FIG. 30B, both sides of the display area of the display device 41 are widened so that the enlarged display areas E1 and E2 can appear. As a result, after the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B are actuated, a powerful effect display can be executed in a large display area.

Next, the special figure 1 start memory number display area SM11 and the special figure 2 start memory number display area SM12 provided in the upper part of the display area of the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game display area CG11, and the second special figure variable display. The optimum position of the game display area CG12 will be described.
In the present embodiment, as described above, the second special variation device (big prize opening 2) 42 is provided in the upper left portion of the surrounding frame body 40, and the side effect is provided on the right side portion of the surrounding frame body 40. A unit 900 is provided. As shown in FIG. 31, the side effect unit 900 includes a third movable member 46A including a disk 463 having a decoration on the front surface and a lamp inside, and an arm member 464 that holds the disk 463, and the third movable member 46A. A right hand motor 461 (see FIG. 6) for rotating the movable member is provided, and the disk 463 is positioned upward as shown by a solid line in FIG. 31 from the state where the disk 463 is positioned downward with the rotation shaft 462 as the center. It is comprised so that it may move to the state to do.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31, the upper left corner of the display area of the display device 41 is concealed by the members constituting the second special variation device 42, and the side effect unit 900 in which the upper right corner of the display area has moved is movable. The display area is narrowed by being hidden by the decorative member 942. That is, the upper part of the display area is unsuitable for use as an area for displaying a character or the like that enhances the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the side display area A3 that is concealed by the members constituting the second special variation device 42 at the top of the display area is divided into the start memory number display areas SM11 and SM12 and the variable display game display area CG11. , CG12 and CG21, CG22. Thereby, there is an advantage that display using the entire display area can be effectively performed.

(Modification 1)
Next, a modification of the frame effect device 430 will be described.
In the first modification, the shapes of the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B are different from those of the above embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32A, the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48A and the second movable member are formed in an arc shape so that the inner surfaces of the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B bulge outward. When the left side surface of the first movable member 48A and the right side surface of the second movable member 48B coincide with each other when the 48B is moved inward, the center of the display area of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. For example, one central display area A0 having a vertically elliptical shape is formed. Further, the right effect display area A1 appears on the right side of the display area of the display device 41, and the left effect display area A2 appears on the left side of the display area of the display device 41. In the central display area A0, as shown in FIG. 32 (A) → FIG. 32 (B), the orientation of the character to be displayed is changed according to the size.

  Further, a plurality of concave portions H11, H12, H13; H21, H22, H23 are formed at the same height position on the outer side surfaces of the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B, and the first movable member 48A moved to the center side. As shown in FIG. 33A, immediately after the left side surface of the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B pass, that is, when the right side surface of the first movable member 48A and the left side surface of the second movable member 48B coincide. A plurality of partition display areas DA1, DA2, DA3 are formed in the center of the display area of the display device 41. Then, characters such as “ma”, “sa”, and “ka” are displayed on each of the displayed partition display areas DA1, DA2, and DA3 so as to notify or suggest the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to make a dramatic production. When the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B are further moved so that the display area A0 is enlarged in the center of the display area of the display device 41, the character is displayed as shown in FIG. You may make it perform the effect which displays what was reversed from the thing of 33 (A).

(Modification 2)
In the second modification, the structure of the belt clamping portion 483c on the upper surface of the sliders 483A and 483B is different from that of the above embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34A, a protrusion 483g is formed on the upper surface of the belt clamping portion 483c of the sliders 483A and 483B, and a belt fastening member 484 ′ to be joined to the back surface is formed in an inverted L shape. In addition, an engagement hole 484g that can be engaged with the protrusion 483g is provided at the corner. In addition, a fixing hole 483h is formed in the back surface of the sliders 483A and 483B, and a screw insertion hole 484h is formed in the lid member 484.

Note that a belt meshing portion 483d having irregularities that can mesh with a plurality of teeth of the belt 443A or 443B is provided on the back surface of the upper end of the belt clamping portion 483c, as in the above embodiment.
In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), after the belt engaging portion 483d of the belt holding portion 483c is joined to the belt 443A or 443B, the protrusion 483g is inserted into the engagement hole 484g on the upper surface of the belt holding portion 483c. Then, the lid member 484 is joined to the back surface of the belt clamping portion 483c. Thereafter, the screw 490 is inserted into the screw insertion hole 484h and the tip is screwed into the fixing hole 483h, whereby the belt 443A or 443B is sandwiched between the belt clamping portion 483c and the lid member 484 as shown in FIG. In this state, both can be combined.

(Example)
Next, another example of the effect using the frame effect device 430 will be described.
In the first effect example, a reach effect is performed by moving one of the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B of the frame effect device 430. For example, as shown in FIG. During the change, character A appears as shown in (B). Subsequently, after the character B is introduced as shown in (C), the first movable member 48A is moved to the center side as shown in (D), and the effect display as if the character A is pressing the movable member is performed. .
Thereafter, if the result of the variable game is a big hit, the first movable member 48A is completely moved to the left as shown in (E) to display the victory of the character A, and the variable symbol is shown as a big win as shown in (F). Stop at the symbol. If the result of the variation game is out of place, after the first movable member 48A is in the center (D), the first movable member 48A is moved to the right and moved to the original position. The loss of the character A may be displayed and the variation symbol may be removed and stopped at the symbol. In addition, a reach effect may be performed in which the character B appears first by moving the second movable member 48B instead of the first movable member 48A.

The second example is a game machine that performs probability control so that multiple consecutive big hits are likely to occur continuously. This makes it easy to recognize.
Specifically, for example, when probability control is performed with 5 hits per jackpot as a set, the first movable member 48A and the first movable member 48A of the frame body effect device 430 are used as shown in FIG. 2 The variable display game is executed with the movable member 48B in the initial position. Then, after the first big hit is generated and the big hit game is finished, the first movable member 48A and the second movable member of the frame effect device 430 are used as shown in FIG. The variable display game is executed with 48B slightly moved.

  Further, during the challenge of the third big hit, as shown in FIG. 37C, the variable display game is executed with the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B of the frame body effect device 430 moved to the center. During the challenge of the fourth big hit, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B of the frame effect production device 430 are moved to the opposite area while passing each other. Run the game. Further, during the challenge of the fifth big hit, as shown in FIG. 38, the variable display game is performed in a state where the first movable member 48A and the second movable member 48B of the frame effect device 430 are completely moved to the opposite standby positions. Run.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a first example of the second embodiment will be described.
In the second embodiment, in the movable accessory device having a pair of movable members provided on the left side and the right side of the surrounding frame body 40 that surrounds the display device 41, the pair of movable members are arranged in front of the display device 41, respectively. A covering member is provided to conceal the gap generated when the upper end and the lower end are moved close to the center side so that light of the rear image does not leak from the gap.

FIG. 39 is a front view showing a configuration example of the game board in the first example of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same parts and members as those of the game board (FIG. 2) in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 39, the game board 30 is formed with a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. In the game area 32, an enclosing frame 40 as an enclosing frame having a display device 41 is disposed at substantially the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the surrounding frame body 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the surrounding frame body 40. That is, the surrounding frame body 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed so as to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41.

  Further, a pair of movable decorative members 48A and 48B that are movable toward the front center side of the display device 41 are provided on the right side and the left side of the surrounding frame body 40, and the movable decorative members 48A and 48B operate. A board effect device for effecting a game is configured. When the movable decorative members 48A, 48 are moved to the center side of the display device 41, the upper end and the lower end thereof are close to each other, and form, for example, a “ring” having a significant shape as a whole. The movable decorative members 48A and 48B can be moved by a drive mechanism similar to the drive mechanism (see FIGS. 13 to 17) of the display unit partition effect unit 440 in the first embodiment.

Further, this board effect device moves from above and below respectively when the movable decorative members 48A and 48B move to the center side of the display device 41 and the upper and lower ends are close to each other to form a significant shape. A pair of covering members 49A and 49B are provided to cover the front of the gaps between the adjacent portions.
Further, a front decorative member 47 is provided at the upper right portion of the surrounding frame body 40, and a part thereof projects toward the right game ball flow path 32 </ b> A of the game area 32. The protruding portion of the front decorative member 47 is separated from the surface of the game board, so that a game ball can pass through the back of the front decorative member 47.

Further, the lower right portion of the surrounding frame body 40 includes a special figure 1 effect symbol display 45A for executing the effect of the first special figure variation display game and an LED lamp for executing the effect of the second special figure variation display game. Special figure 1 design symbol display 45B is provided, and the pair of movable decorative members 48A, 48B move to the center side of the display device 41, making it difficult to see the special display variation display game displayed on the display device 41. Even so, you can check the progress of the game.
In the game board of the present embodiment, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is disposed on the right side of the surrounding frame body 40, and the first special figure variation display game or the second game is displayed diagonally to the left. 2 A special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged.

Further, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided below the surrounding frame body 40, and a game ball is directly below the start winning opening 36. Is provided with a pair of movable decorative members 37b, 37b that can be converted from a state in which it does not flow into a state in which it can easily flow in, and an ordinary variable winning device (normal power) 37 having a second start winning opening (start winning area) inside. Has been.
In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the display of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, the normal figure fluctuation display game, and various information are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided. Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

Next, the detailed configuration and operation of the board effect device used for the game board of the second embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 40A, in the board effect device of the present embodiment, the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are respectively located on the left and right side portions (hereinafter referred to as standby positions) of the display device 41 in the normal gaming state. When the predetermined effect condition is established, the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are moved to the center side of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. Further, when the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are moved to the center side of the display device 41 and the upper end and the lower end thereof are close to each other, as shown in FIG. 49A and 49B respectively move to the front of the display device 41 so as to cover the front of the proximity portion.
As a result, even if there is a gap in the vicinity of the movable decorative members 48A and 48B as shown in FIG. 41 (A) due to variations during assembly, as shown in FIG. By hiding with the members 49A and 49B, it can be avoided that the light of the image leaking from the gap between the movable decorative members 48A and 48B is seen from the front and the player is awakened.

FIG. 42 shows the relationship between a control device and electronic components such as a drive source and a sensor constituting the board rendering device of the present embodiment.
The control system of the gaming machine in this embodiment is composed of a plurality of control devices such as the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 receives commands from the game control device 100. In response to the effect control, the drive source constituting the board effect device is controlled by the effect control device 300.
As a drive source of the board effect device, a right movable decorative member drive motor 44M1 that moves the right movable decorative member 48A, a left movable decorative member drive motor 44M2 that moves the left movable decorative member 48B, and a movable decorative member 48A. There is an upper covering member drive motor 44M3 that conceals the gap between the upper adjacent portions of 48B, and a lower covering member drive motor 44M4 that conceals the gap between the lower adjacent portions of the movable decorative members 48A and 48B.

  Further, the sensor of the board effect device of the present embodiment includes a first right movable decorative member detection sensor 44S1 for detecting that the right movable decorative member 48A has reached the initial position which is a standby position, and a left movable decorative member. A first left movable decorative member detection sensor 44S2 that detects that 48B has reached the standby position, a first upper covering member detection sensor 44S3 that detects that the upper intermediate covering member 49A has reached the standby position, and a lower There is a first lower covering member detection sensor 44S4 that detects that the covering member 49B has reached the standby position.

  Further, the sensor for the board effect device includes a second right movable decorative member detection sensor 44S5 for detecting that the right movable decorative member 48A has reached a position close to the other movable decorative member at the center of the display device 41; The second left movable decorative member detection sensor 44S6 for detecting that the left movable decorative member 48B has reached the proximity position with the other movable decorative member, and the upper intermediate covering member 49A at a position where the upper adjacent portion is hidden. A second upper covering member detection sensor 44S7 for detecting that it has reached, and a second lower covering member detection sensor 44S8 for detecting that the lower intermediate covering member 49B has reached a position for concealing the lower adjacent portion. There is.

By the way, the board production device of this embodiment avoids interference when the movable decorative members 48A, 48B moving in the left-right direction and the covering members 49A, 49B are simultaneously operated while moving in the up-down direction. As shown in the figure, they are operated separately.
Thus, the control procedure for avoiding interference between the moving members is shown in FIG. FIG. 43A is a control flow (operation process) for the movable decorative members 48A and 48B, and FIG. 43B is a control flow for the cover members 49A and 49B.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, in the operation process of the movable decorative members 48A and 48B, both the first upper covering member detection sensor 44S3 and the first lower covering member detection sensor 44S4 are both on, that is, between the upper side. It is determined whether or not both the covering member 49A and the lower covering member 49B are in the standby position (step S101). If both sensors are determined to be on (step S101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S102 to operate the left and right movable decorative members 48A and 48B. If it is determined in step S101 that both the first upper covering member detection sensor 44S3 and the first lower covering member detection sensor 44S4 are not on (No), the process proceeds to step S103, and the upper and lower covering members 49A are moved. , 49B.

As shown in FIG. 43 (B), in the operation processing of the covering members 49A, 49B, both the second right movable decoration member detection sensor 44S5 and the second left movable member detection sensor 44S6 are both turned on, that is, the right movable decoration. It is determined whether or not both the member 48B and the left movable member 48B are in the central proximity position (step S111). If it is determined that both sensors are on (step S111: Yes), the process proceeds to step S112 to operate the covering members 49A and 49B between the upper and lower sides. If it is determined in step S111 that both the second right movable decorative member detection sensor 44S5 and the second left movable member detection sensor 44S6 are not on (No), the process proceeds to step S113, and the left and right movable decorative members 48A, 48A, Activate 48B.
With the control as described above, the movable decorative members 48A and 48B that move in the left-right direction and the covering members 49A and 49B that are moved in the up-down direction can be operated separately to avoid interference with each other.

FIG. 44 shows an example of a mechanism for operating the covering member 49A during the upper side.
In this example, the cover member 49A is formed in a U shape as a whole, one end (rear end) is rotatably supported by the support shaft 49a, and the support shaft 49a so that the front end side is lowered downward. When the is rotated, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the front end piece of the covering member 49A moves to the front of the display device 41 while drawing an arcuate locus, and the proximity of the movable decorative members 48A and 48B is moved. It is comprised so that the front may be coat | covered. The lower intermediate covering member 49B can also be configured to be operated by the mechanism of FIG.

In this embodiment, the cover members 49A and 49B are each formed of a U-shaped member. However, as shown in FIG. 45A, the cover members 49A and 49B are small sub-liquid crystal panels P1. , P2 and the sub liquid crystal panels P1, P2 may cover the front of the proximity of the movable decorative members 48A and 48B.
Further, the second embodiment is applied to the effect unit (see FIG. 32) of the first modified example of the first embodiment described above to provide the covering members 49A and 49B, and the left and right movable partition members 48A. , 48B are moved to the center side of the display device 41 to produce an effect that cooperates with the image, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the cover members 49A, 49B are moved to move the movable partition member 48A. And 48B (see FIG. 32B) may be covered.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are moved to the center of the display device 41 and assembled, and then the cover members 49A and 49B are moved to the front of the display device 41 so that the movable decorative members 48A and 48B come close to each other. The display unit 41 displays the movable decorative member 48A, 48B as an image and moves the movable decorative member of the image from the left and right ends of the screen to the center. Then, the assembled state may be displayed, and the intermediate covering members 49A and 49B may be moved so as to cover the front part of the proximity portion of the movable decorative member displayed as a group.

Then, the effect by the real movable decorative members 48A and 48B and the inter-cover members 49A and 49B is executed when the effect is notified with high reliability that the result of the variable display game is a big hit, for example. Various effects can be realized by executing the effect by the covering member 49A, 49B between the movable decorative member and the real image as in the case of notifying that the result of the variable display game is a big hit, for example, with low reliability. The notice effect can be made, and the effect of the change display game can be enhanced.
Further, in the above embodiment, the covering members 49A and 49B are configured to be movable in an arc shape from the back to the front of the display device 41. However, the covering members 49A are parallel or oblique to the display screen of the display device 41. May be moved from above to below, and the covering member 49B may be moved from below to above.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second example of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, a pair of pivotally provided frame bodies (left and lower portions in the figure) of the surrounding frame 40 surrounding the display device 41 is provided. In the board effect device having the movable decorative members 48A and 48B, the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are rotated to the front center side of the display device 41 to conceal the gap generated when the tips are close to each other to hide the rear image. The cover member 49 is provided while being rotatable so that light does not leak from the gap.
Specifically, each of the movable decorative members 48A and 48B is rotatably supported by support shafts 48a and 48b provided on the frame body portion of the surrounding frame body 40 at one end, and is a drive motor (not shown). It is rotated.

Further, in this embodiment, although not particularly limited, a shape that imitates a “baseball bat” as a whole when the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are rotated toward the center as shown in FIG. 46 (B). On the other hand, the covering member 49 is shaped like a “baseball ball”.
Since the movable decorative members 48A and 48B and the space covering member 49 are formed as described above, for example, after the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are rotated toward the center as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 47A, the intermediate covering member 49 is moved to the center, and then the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are returned to their original positions as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the inter-sheath member 49 is returned to the original position.

In the case of FIG. 47 (A) → (B), an effect that the ball hits and the bat is broken by the above operation, and in the case of FIG. 47 (A) → (C), the ball You can show the rendition of hitting the bat. If the result of the variable display game is out of place, an effect as shown in FIG. 47 (A) → (B) is shown during the execution of the game, and the result of the variable display game is hit or reach. 47 (A) → (C), a notice effect can be performed.
In this embodiment, both the movable decorative members 48A and 48B and the inter-layer covering member 49 are configured to be rotatable. However, the movable decorative members 48A and 48B are movable in the left-right direction so that the inter-cover member 49 is rotated. The movable decorative members 48A and 48B may be rotatable, and the intermediate covering member 49 may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction.

From the above description, in the above embodiment,
A plurality of movable decorative members (48A, 48B) configured to be movable on the front side of the display device (41) and capable of forming one significant shape by gathering at least each predetermined portion in one place;
Covering members (49A, 49B) capable of covering the front of the gap generated between the adjacent parts of each movable decorative member in a state where the predetermined parts of the plurality of movable decorative members are gathered in one place,
It can be seen that the present invention includes a control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable decorative member and the operation of the intermediate covering member.

Here, the “gap” includes not only a case where a gap is actually generated but also a portion where a gap is generated or not generated due to variations in parts and assembly.
According to the invention as described above, a plurality of movable decorative members that are configured to be movable on the front side of the display device and that can form one significant shape by gathering at least each predetermined portion in one place. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the display of the variable display game executed on the display device, and to hide the gap generated between the adjacent parts of each movable decorative member, so that a sense of unity can be obtained as an accessory and the decorativeness can be improved. I can do it.

In the above embodiment,
The control means (production control device 300) can display a state in which the movable decorative members (48A, 48B) are gathered in the display device (41) by an image, and the movable decorative members are gathered on the display device. In the case where an image of a state is displayed, an invention in which control for operating the covering member (49A, 49B) can be executed is included.
According to this invention, in addition to the notice effect by the interlocking of the movable decorative member and the covering member, the notice effect by the interlocking of the movable decorative member of the image displayed on the display device and the real covering member can be performed. The effects can be enhanced by diversifying effects.

In the above embodiment,
The movable decorative member (48A, 48B) is configured to be movable in parallel with the display screen of the display device (41),
The present invention includes an invention in which the intermediate covering members (49A, 49B) are configured to be movable in an arc shape in the front-rear direction of the display device.
Here, “moving in an arc shape in the front-rear direction” includes both a case where the display device moves from the back to the front and a case where the display device moves from the front to the back.
According to this invention, it is possible to easily avoid interference during the operation of the movable decorative member and the intercoat member, compared to the case where the intercoat member is also configured to be movable in parallel with the display screen of the display device. Further, the cover member can be moved from the rear to the front of the display device at a relatively short distance, and the drive mechanism of the cover member can be made compact. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which it is moved in an arc shape in the front-rear direction, it can be applied to a model that does not have sufficient space above and below the display device as compared with the case of moving in the up-down direction.

In the above embodiment,
The display device (41) is capable of executing a variable display game that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner.
The invention includes an in-variable display means (50) capable of executing at-variation display indicating that at least the variation display game is being executed, outside the display screen of the display device.
Here, the “design” means a symbol such as a number or alphabet, a picture, or the like.
According to this invention, it is possible to prevent the state where the design of the display device and the changing display means are simultaneously hidden by the movable decorative member, and the player can reliably check whether or not the changing display game is being executed. Can know.

Next, a specific configuration and operation of the front decorative member 47 provided in the upper right part of the surrounding frame body 40 will be described.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), an enclosing frame as a base member having an armor portion 40a provided to protrude forward from the surface of the game board and restricting the flow-down direction of the game ball at the upper portion. Between the outer surface of the upper right portion of 40 and the guide surface 31a of the game ball guide member 31A, there is formed a flow-down path 32A having a slightly larger gap than the diameter of the game balls and allowing the game balls B to flow one by one. ing. A front decoration member 47 (circular in the drawing) is provided on the upper right portion of the armor portion 40a of the surrounding frame body 40 so that a part thereof protrudes toward the right game ball flow path of the game area 32. The game ball guide member 31A is a member (integrated with or coupled to the side case 33) having a guide surface 31a continuous with the guide rail 31 (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 48B, which shows a cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 48A, the front decoration member 47 is almost the same as the surface of the game board 30 on the front surface of the armor portion 40 a of the surrounding frame body 40. It is attached in parallel with an interval of one game ball, and is arranged so as to protrude from the outer surface of the armor portion 40a toward the flow down path 32A, and the amount of protrusion is slightly smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Yes. That is, the amount of protrusion is set so that the front decoration member 47 does not completely hide the game ball when the game ball passes along the outer surface of the armor portion 40a to the flow down path 32A.
The front decoration member 47 as described above is provided in the upper right portion of the armor portion 40a of the surrounding frame body 40, so that the game ball can pass through the flow path 32A on the right side of the armor portion 40a. In addition, it looks as if the game ball is passing through the armor portion 40a, so that it is possible to change the way the game ball flows down and to improve the decorativeness of the armor portion 40a.

FIG. 49 shows another embodiment of the front decoration member 47.
In this embodiment, a step portion 31b that weakens the momentum of the game ball is provided on the game ball guide member 31A, and a step portion is provided on the surface of the surrounding frame 40 that faces the armor portion 40a corresponding to the step portion 31b. A front decoration member 47 is provided so as to cover the part.
Further, as shown in FIG. 49B, which shows a cross section along the line AA in FIG. 49A, the upper portion of the armor portion 40a of the surrounding frame body 40 is in contact with the back surface side of the front decoration member 47. It is preferable to form a cover member 40c for protecting the game ball passing through the flow down path 32A from hitting the front decoration member 47 and damaging it.

As described above, when the cover member 40c is formed, even when the frequency of collision of game balls is high in a right-handed base that is advantageous when a player plays a game aiming at the right side of the game area in a predetermined gaming state. The effect of reducing damage to the front decorative member 47 can be obtained. Incidentally, the embodiment of FIG. 48 without such a cover member 40c reduces the frequency of collision of game balls when applied to a left-handed platform that may be disadvantageous when a player plays a game aiming at the right side of the game area. Thus, damage to the front decorative member 47 can be reduced.
In the embodiment of FIG. 49, an elastic body such as rubber may be attached to the step portion 31b provided in the game ball guide member 31A so as to reduce the momentum of the game ball that has collided. Thereby, the damage of the front decoration member 47 by the game ball bounced off by hitting the elastic body of the step portion 31b can be further reduced.

FIG. 50 shows a first modification of the above embodiment in which the front decoration member 47 is provided.
In this modified example, instead of providing the front decorative member 47 in the armor portion 40a of the surrounding frame body 40, the front decorative member 47 is provided on the front surface of the front end of the intermediate covering member 49 in the embodiment of FIG. Arranged so that a part of the front decoration member 47 protrudes toward the game ball flow path 32A on the right side of the surrounding frame body 40 in a state of being positioned at a portion (standby position) overlapping with the right side portion of the surrounding frame body 40. It is a thing.

In this modified example, normally, as shown in FIG. 51A, the front decoration member 47 is positioned on the outside, that is, the upper right part of the surrounding frame body 40, and a big hit game or an ordinary variable winning device is established. When it is advantageous for a player to play a game aiming at the right side of the game area in a predetermined game state where the probability is high, such as during an electric support, as shown in FIG. The front decorative member 47 is moved inwardly, that is, forward of the display device 41 by rotating around. FIG. 52 shows the relationship between the gaming state and the position of the front decorative member 47 when such control is performed.
As described above, it is possible to notify the player that right-handed driving is advantageous by moving the front decoration member 47 that covers a part of the flow-down path 32A to the display device 41 side. In addition, as a gaming machine that is advantageous to the right hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 39, there is a gaming machine in which a general gate 34 and a special variable winning device (large winning mouth) 38 are arranged on the right side of the gaming area. .

Further, the front decoration member 47 at the front end of the covering member 49 is configured by a display device capable of changing the display content, and the display content is changed according to the position as shown in FIGS. 51 (A) → (B). In particular, when moving to the display device 41 side, a character “right-handed” may be displayed so that the player is more clearly notified that right-handed is advantageous.
Further, instead of configuring the front decoration member 47 with a display device, a simple decoration member is used, and when the front decoration member 47 is moved to the display device 41 side, the screen is not hidden by the front decoration member 47 on the screen of the display device 41. The character “right-handed” may be displayed to notify that right-handed is advantageous.

FIG. 53 shows a second modification of the above embodiment in which the front decoration member 47 is provided.
In this modification, not only one front decorative member 47 is provided on the armor portion 40a of the surrounding frame body 40, but a plurality of front decorative members are provided on the right side portion of the surrounding frame body 40 as shown in FIG. 47a, 47b... 47e are arranged along the game ball flow path 32A.
Further, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), a passing ball sensor BS that detects a game ball passing near or slightly upstream of the front decorative member 47 is provided, and an LED is provided on the back of the front decorative member 47. A lamp Ld is provided, and when the passing ball sensor BS detects a game ball, the LED lamps Ld are sequentially turned on as shown in FIG.

The front decoration member 47 is made of, for example, a transparent or translucent synthetic resin plate, so that the player can easily recognize that the front decoration member 47 has been turned on when the back lamp is turned on. Thereby, it can be notified that the game ball is flowing down the flow path 32A on the right side of the game area.
Only one passing ball sensor BS may be provided corresponding to the most upstream front decorative member 47a, or may be provided for all front decorative members 47a, 47b... 47e. Further, a plurality of front decoration members 47 may be disposed over the entire flow-down path 32A on the right side of the game area, that is, over the range indicated by symbol E in FIG. Only one of them may be provided.

From the above description, in the above embodiment,
A base board formed with a game board (30) having a game area (32) through which a game ball can flow down, and an armor portion (40a) that protrudes from the surface of the game board to the game area and regulates the flow direction of the game ball. (40) and a front decoration member (47) for decorating the front side of the game board,
The front decoration member (47) has a diameter equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball between the surface of the armor portion (40a) and the surface of the game board from the surface of the game board to the game area side substantially parallel to the surface of the game board (30). It can be seen that the invention includes an arrangement in which the game balls are arranged so as to protrude to such an extent that a part of the game balls flowing down can be seen.
According to the invention as described above, since it can be seen that the ball is flowing down between the front decoration member and the surface of the game board, it is possible to avoid the inflow of the game ball from being invisible and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented and the decorativeness of the armor can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment,
In the normal state, the game board (30) has a game ball in a region on the left side of the center compared to the case where the game ball flows down in a region on the right side (flow path 32A) of the game region (32). Is configured to be more advantageous for the player when
The invention is such that the front decoration member (47) is provided in a region on the right side of the center of the game region of the game board.
According to this invention, since the game ball often flows down the area on the left side of the center of the game area, the frequency of the ball hitting the front decorative member provided so as to protrude to the right area of the game area is reduced. The possibility that the ball hits the front decorative member and is damaged is reduced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment,
The front decoration member (47) is configured to be movable in and out of the base member (40) and includes control means (production control device 300) for controlling the movement of the front decoration member. It is.
Here, the “inside / outside direction” includes both a direction from the inside to the outside and a direction from the outside to the inside.
According to this invention, it is possible to prevent the front decoration member from being damaged by moving the front decoration member that does not collide with the game ball toward the inside of the base member, and, for example, according to the gaming state By changing the position of the front decorative member, it is possible to enhance the effect of playing the game.

In the above embodiment,
The base member (40) includes an invention in which a cover member (40c) is provided that covers the surface on the side through which the game ball of the portion protruding to the outside of the front decorative member (47) passes.
According to the invention, the cover member prevents the passing game ball from directly touching the portion that protrudes to the outside of the front decorative member, so that the front decorative member is not damaged by the passed game ball. It can be avoided.

In the above embodiment,
The base member (40)
Passing ball detection means (BS) provided at a position corresponding to the front decoration member (47) and detecting that a game ball has passed;
A light emitting member (Ld) capable of emitting light based on a detection result of the passing ball detecting means;
With
The invention is configured such that the light emitting member emits light when a sphere passes through a position corresponding to the front decorative member.
According to this invention, the decorativeness can be improved, and even if it becomes difficult to see the game ball passing by the front decorative member, the player is notified that the game ball is passing by the light emitting member emitting light. I can understand.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment,
In the game board (30), in a specific gaming state, the game ball flows down the area on the right side (downflow path 32A) compared to the case where the game ball flows down the area on the left side of the center of the game area (32). Configured to be more advantageous for the player,
The invention is such that the front decoration member (47) is controlled to be located inside the base member (40) in the specific gaming state.

Here, the “specific game state” means that the probability of occurrence of a special display result is high in the special figure variation display game in addition to the big hit state in which the special variation winning device is established, which is generated by the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. This means a probability change state (high probability state) to be released, a power support state (normal power support state) in which the probability that the normally variable winning device is established is increased, and the like.
According to this invention, even if the player performs a launch operation aiming at the right side of the center of the game area in the specific game state such as the big hit game state, the probability change state, the electric support state, Since the front decorative member is moved to the inside of the base member, there is no possibility that a ball hits the front decorative member and is damaged.

[Configuration of batch display device]
Next, a detailed configuration and function of the collective display device 50 used in the game board of the second embodiment will be described. The collective display device 50 according to the second embodiment can be used for models with different distribution of the number of rounds at the time of a big hit game, or a plurality of game boards having different jackpot occurrence probability even in the same configuration. The layout of the display device has been devised to enhance its versatility, and the display function set according to the specifications of the game board to be applied has a cover plate with marks, explanatory characters or symbols. Notification is made by exchanging or turning it over.

(First embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 56, the collective display device 50 of the first embodiment is arranged in three rows and five columns with special figure indicators 51 and 52 constituted by two 7 segment type indicators (LEDs) and the like. The eleven LED lamps L0 to L10 thus formed are mounted on a rectangular substrate such as a printed wiring board. Hereinafter, this substrate is referred to as a special figure display substrate. The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 shown in FIG. 56 are 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) with dots, but they may also be 7-segment LEDs without dots or filament type. Good. Further, the present invention is not limited to the segment arrangement capable of displaying the numeral “8”, and may have a configuration in which LEDs and lamps are arranged in another predetermined arrangement.
In the present embodiment, when the display board 50 such as the special figure configured as described above is mounted on a game board and used, the cover plate 50A is covered so as to cover the surface. FIGS. 57A to 57C show a state in which the cover plate 50A is put on the surface of the special-purpose display substrate 50. FIG.

  The cover plate 50A has a portion on the surface of a transparent relatively thin plastic plate that corresponds to a portion that is desired to transmit light, that is, a portion of the display or lamp of the display board 50 such as a special figure on the back that is desired to be seen from the surface. Opaque paint is applied to the removed areas by printing, etc., and letters indicating the number of rounds such as “4R” and “16R” and enclosing marks MI, M2... Printed and configured. Instead of providing a transmission part by not applying a paint to the surface of the plate, an opening may be formed.

In this embodiment, by changing the type and position of characters and marks to be printed on the cover plate 50A according to the specifications of the game board to be applied, a special drawing or the like common to a plurality of types of game boards having different specifications is displayed. The substrate 50 can be used.
Specifically, it is possible to execute the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that variably display special symbols, and the round number distribution during the big hit game is 4 rounds (4R) and 16 rounds ( 16R), the cover plate 50A printed as shown in FIG. 57A is placed on the surface of the display board 50 such as a special figure.

In addition, a special figure variation display game in which special symbols are displayed in a variable manner without any distinction between special figure 1 and special figure 2 is executed by 7-segment display units 51 and 52, and the number of rounds in the big hit game is divided into four rounds. (4R), 8 rounds (8R) and 16 rounds (16R) gaming machines (model B), the cover plate 50A printed as shown in FIG. Cover the surface of the display substrate 50.
Furthermore, a special figure variable display game that simply displays special symbols in a variable manner without any distinction between special figures 1 and 2 is executed on the 7-segment display 51, and the distribution of the number of rounds in the big hit game is 4 rounds (4R ), 8 rounds (8R) and 16 rounds (16R) gaming machines (model C), the cover plate 50A printed as shown in FIG. 50 covers.

  In the special figure display board 50 for model A shown in FIG. 57 (A), the first special figure variable display game for displaying special symbols on the 7-segment type display 51 is executed, and the 7-segment display is executed. The second special figure variation display game is executed on the display 52 of the type. It should be noted that the first special figure variation display game on the display 51 is started based on the occurrence of start memory due to winning of a game ball at the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) or winning during changing. The second special figure variation display game at 52 is started on the basis of the occurrence of the start memory due to the winning of the game ball in the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) or the winning in the variation. On the contrary, the second special figure variation display game may be executed on the display 51 and the first special figure variation display game may be executed on the display 52.

Further, in the special figure display board 50 of FIG. 57 (A), when the LED lamp L0 surrounded by the mark M1 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game generated is 4 rounds (4R). To do. Further, when the two LED lamps L1 and L6 surrounded by the mark M2 are turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 16 rounds (4R).
Furthermore, the two LED lamps L2 and L3 surrounded by the mark M3 are used for executing the usual map display game. Specifically, the lamps L2 and L3 are alternately lit during the fluctuation, the lamp L2 is lit when it is off, the L3 is turned off and stopped, and the lamp L2 is turned off and L3 is lit and stopped when hitting. . In the case of winning, both L2 and L3 may be turned on and stopped.

The two LED lamps L7 and L8 surrounded by the mark M4 are used for displaying the start memory number (holding number) of the usual start gate 34. Specifically, for example, when the number of holdings is “1”, one lamp L7 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, two lamps L7 and L8 are turned on, and the number of holdings is “ When it is “3”, one lamp L7 is blinked and the other lamp L8 is turned on, and when the number of holding is “4”, the two lamps L7 and L8 are blinked.
The two LED lamps L4 and L5 surrounded by the mark M5 are undigested balls out of the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 which is a start condition of the first special figure variation display game executed by the display 51. Displays the number (starting memory number = holding number). The two LED lamps L9 and L10 surrounded by the mark M6 are undigested out of the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37 which is a start condition of the second special figure variation display game executed by the display 52. The number of balls (starting memory number = holding number) is displayed. A specific method of displaying the number of holdings is the same as the display of the number of usual starting memories (the number of holdings) by the LED lamps L7 and L8.

In the special figure display board 50 for model B shown in FIG. 57 (B), the special figure variation display game is executed by the seven-segment type indicators 51 and 52. When the LED lamp L0 surrounded by the mark M1 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 4 rounds (4R). In addition, when the LED lamp L1 surrounded by the mark M2 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 8 rounds (8R). Further, when the LED lamp L6 surrounded by the mark M7 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 16 rounds (16R). Since there is no distinction between special figure 1 and special figure 2, opaque paint is applied to portions of LED lamps L9 and L10 so that the back lamp cannot be seen.
The number of holdings by the two LED lamps L2 and L3 surrounded by the mark M3, the two LED lamps L7 and L8 surrounded by the mark M4, and the two LED lamps L4 and L5 surrounded by the mark M5 The notification is the same as that for the special-figure display board 50 in FIG.

In the special figure display board 50 for the model C shown in FIG. 57C, the special figure variation display game is executed only by the 7-segment type display 51. Since the display unit 52 is not used, the portion corresponding to the display unit 52 is coated with opaque paint so that the back light cannot be seen, and the characters “4R”, “8R”, and “16R” are printed. . When the LED lamp L0 surrounded by the mark M1 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 4 rounds (4R). In addition, when the LED lamp L1 surrounded by the mark M2 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 8 rounds (8R). Further, when the LED lamp L6 surrounded by the mark M7 is turned on, it is notified that the number of rounds in the big hit game that has occurred is 16 rounds (16R).
The number of holdings by the two LED lamps L2 and L3 surrounded by the mark M3, the two LED lamps L7 and L8 surrounded by the mark M4, and the two LED lamps L4 and L5 surrounded by the mark M5 The notification is the same as that for the special-figure display substrate 50 in FIG.

(Second embodiment)
FIG. 58 shows the configuration of a special figure display substrate (collective display device) 50 according to the second embodiment. The difference from the configuration of the special-figure display board 50 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 56 is that the special-figure display board 50 of the second embodiment has a larger number of LED lamps and the 19 LED lamps L0. ˜L18 is configured by being mounted on the substrate.
Similar to the first embodiment, when the display board 50 such as a special figure is mounted on a game board and used, a cover plate 50A corresponding to the model is put on the surface. FIGS. 59A to 59C show a state in which the cover plate 50A for model D, model E, and model F is placed on the surface of the special-purpose display substrate 50 of FIG. Of these, in the special figure display board 50 for the model D in FIG. 59A, the 7 segment type indicators 51 and 52 are the variable display game of the special figures 1 and 2 as in the above embodiment. In the special figure display board 50 for the model E in FIG. 59B, the indicators 51 and 52 are used for displaying the “round number”, and the model F in FIG. 59C is used. In the special figure display board 50, the indicators 51 and 52 are used for displaying the “starting memory number” in the special figures 1 and 2.

In the cover plate 50A used for the special figure display board for model D shown in FIG. 59 (A), the universal map display game is executed by the two LED lamps L0 and L1 surrounded by the mark M1, The number of rounds is displayed by the LED lamp L4 surrounded by the mark M2, the LED lamp L9 surrounded by the mark M3, and the LED lamp L14 surrounded by the mark M4. In addition, the number of normal start memories (reserved number) is indicated by the two LED lamps L7 and L8 surrounded by the mark M5, and the special figure 1 start memory is indicated by the two LED lamps L12 and L13 surrounded by the mark M6. The number (holding number) is displayed, and the special figure 2 starting memory number (holding number) is displayed by the two LED lamps L17 and L18 surrounded by the mark M7.
The parts corresponding to the lamps other than the lamp are coated with opaque paint so that the light from the back lamp cannot be seen.

In the special figure display board 50 for model E shown in FIG. 59 (B), as described above, the 7 segment type indicators 51 and 52 are used for displaying the number of rounds.
On the cover plate 50 </ b> A used for the special figure display substrate 50, the letter “R” meaning round is printed beside the 7-segment display 52. In addition, the usual figure change display game is executed by the two LED lamps L0 and L1 surrounded by the mark M1, and the usual figure start memory number (holding number) by the two LED lamps L2 and L3 surrounded by the mark M2. Is displayed. Also, the special figure 2 start memory number (holding number) is displayed by the two LED lamps L5 and L6 surrounded by the mark M3, and the special figure 1 start is shown by the two LED lamps L7 and L8 surrounded by the mark M4. Displays the number of memories (holding number).

  Then, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by the four LED lamps L10, L11, L15, and L16 surrounded by the mark M5, and the four LED lamps L12, L13, L17, and L18 surrounded by the mark M6. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed. For example, a variation display game using four LED lamps may be considered as “winning” when the lamps are circulated in order and stopped at a predetermined position, and “off” when stopped at other positions. Since the LED lamps L4, L9 and L14 are not used in this model, an opaque paint is applied to the portion so that the light from the back lamp cannot be seen.

In the special figure display board 50 for model F shown in FIG. 59 (C), the 7-segment display 51 is used to display the special figure 2 start memory number (holding number), and the 7-segment display 52 is Special figure 1 Used to display the number of starting memories (holding number)
In the cover plate 50A used for the display board 50 such as the special figure, the usual figure display game is executed by the two LED lamps L0 and L1 surrounded by the mark M1, and the two LEDs surrounded by the mark M2 are executed. The normal start memory number (holding number) is displayed by the lamps L2 and L3. The number of rounds is displayed by the LED lamp L4 surrounded by the mark M3 and the LED lamps L9 and L14 surrounded by the mark M4.
Then, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by the four LED lamps L10, L11, L15, and L16 surrounded by the mark M5, and the four LED lamps L12, L13, L17, and L18 surrounded by the mark M6. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed. Since the LED lamps L5, L6 and L7, L8 are not used in this model, an opaque paint is applied to the portion so that the light from the back lamp cannot be seen.

(Modification)
Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described.
FIG. 60 shows a configuration of a model A ′ using a cover plate 50A for model A shown in FIG. 57 (A) on a special-purpose display board 50 shown in FIG. 58 as a first modification. Yes.
In this modified example, when the gaming machine is closed in a high probability state and the power is shut off, and the power is turned on to start the next day, the gaming control device determines that the gaming machine is in a high probability state. The LED lamp L0 is lit to notify that it is in a high probability state, and when it is determined that there is no abnormality at the time of inspection before shipment in the factory, the LED lamp L2 is lit to notify that it is normal. It is what.
The paint is applied to the portions corresponding to the LED lamps L0 to L3 of the cover plate 50A, but the thickness of the paint film is set so that light can be seen through the paint film. In addition, you may make it apply | coat a coating film only to one side, without applying a coating film to the said site | part.

The second modification is the embodiment in which the first special figure variation display game is executed by the 7-segment type display 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed by the display 52. Of the plurality of big wins of the variable display game of 2, the game stop result in which the 16 round big hit occurs is the same symbol (“7” in the figure) as shown in FIG. 61 (A). In addition, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the stop result of the off-game of the special display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is the same pattern (“−” in the middle in the figure). is there.
As described above, the result of the game can be obtained by making the symbols different from the special display result that generates the special gaming state in each of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. Can be easily understood by the player.

In the third modified example, as shown in FIG. 61C, an area DA for printing the model name, specifications (specifications), etc. of the gaming machine is provided in a part of the cover plate 50A.
In recent years, game machines have been proposed in which the configuration of the game boards is the same and only the probability of occurrence of jackpots is different. In this case, the print pattern of the cover plate 50A used for each game machine is different. However, since the game board has the same configuration, there is a risk of erroneous attachment of the plate. Therefore, the color of the cell to be affixed to the surface of the game board is varied according to the probability of jackpot occurrence. For the cover plate 50A to be placed on the display board 50 such as a special figure, a plurality of color plates corresponding to the probability of the jackpot are prepared corresponding to the cell color of the game board. You may make it hard to produce a sticking mistake by comprising so that the plate of the same color may be stuck.

(Third embodiment)
FIG. 62 shows the configuration of a special figure display substrate (collective display device) 50 according to the third embodiment. In the special figure display board 50 of the third embodiment, fifteen LED lamps L0 to L14 are mounted in three rows and five columns beside the seven-segment type indicators 51 and 52. Further, the cover plate 50A to be placed on the special figure display substrate 50 is printed with characters indicating different numbers of rounds and marks indicating ranges on the front and back surfaces.
FIG. 63 (A) shows a state where one surface of the cover plate 50A is placed on the display substrate 50 such as a special figure, and FIG. In this way, a state where the special figure or the like is placed on the display substrate 50 is shown. Here, the case where the LED lamp which alert | reports the number of rounds differs as an example is shown.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the special figure display substrate 50 of the model coated with one surface of the cover plate 50A facing upward, the number of rounds is increased by lighting the LED lamp L0 surrounded by the mark M1. That the number of rounds is “16”, and that the number of rounds is “16” by the lighting of the LED lamps L5 and L10 surrounded by the mark M2.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63B, in the special figure display board 50 of the model coated with the other surface of the cover plate 50A facing up, the LED lamps L0 and L5 surrounded by the mark M3 are turned on. Thus, it is notified that the number of rounds is “8” and that the number of rounds is “4” by lighting the LED lamp L10 surrounded by the mark M4.

  Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, a special figure or the like is provided by a pair of locking claws 55a and 55b formed on a decoration board or the like outside the game area to which the special figure or the like display board 50 is attached. The structure is such that the left and right edges of the cover plate 50 </ b> A covered with the display substrate 50 are pressed. The cover plate 50A is formed of a thin plastic plate. The cover plate 50A is sandwiched between fingers and curved in a bow shape. The cover plate 50A is placed on a display board 50 such as a special figure and released to return to its original shape (flat plate). Then, both ends of the plate enter under the latching claws 55a and 55b, and the latching claws 55a and 55b can push the left and right edges of the plate so as not to come off.

(Modification)
FIG. 65 shows a first modification of the special-purpose display substrate (collective display device) 50 according to the third embodiment. The special-figure display board 50 of this modification has the same configuration as the special-figure display board 50 shown in FIG. 62, and fifteen LED lamps beside the 7-segment type indicators 51 and 52. L0 to L14 are mounted in 3 rows and 5 columns.
62 is different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 62 in that the cover plate 50A having substantially the same shape is put on the display board 50 such as a special figure in the case of FIG. A trapezoidal cover member 50B, on which characters indicating the number of rounds and marks indicating the range are printed on the surface, is rotatably mounted by support shafts 50a and 50b provided on the upper and lower sides of the right edge portion, and special drawings and the like are displayed. It is comprised so that it can cover on the board | substrate 50. FIG.

The surface of the cover member 50B is opaque to the portions other than the portion corresponding to the display or lamp of the display substrate 50 such as the special figure that is desired to be seen from the surface, like the cover plate 50A of the above embodiment. On the surface of the coating film, characters indicating the number of rounds such as “4R” and “16R”, enclosing marks M1 and M2 indicating the range, model name, jackpot occurrence probability, and the like are printed.
In this modification, a locking portion 50c is provided on the left side of the cover member 50B so as to be locked so as to maintain the state of covering the display board 50 such as a special figure. Further, on the right half of the cover member 50B, there is provided a seal attaching part 50d for attaching an authentication sticker issued by an accreditation body of the gaming machine.

In recent years, for example, we have sold a gaming machine with high euphoria that was initially set to a state where the probability of hitting a jackpot is low (however, the chance of continuous chaining is high), and then collecting the gaming board from this gaming machine and placing it on the back of the gaming board Change to a low gambling machine that has been set to a state where the probability of jackpot occurrence in the installed control device (especially ROM) is high (however, the chance of continuous change is low), and re-apply the authentication sticker to a new one Businesses such as providing to amusement stores are being considered.
By applying this modification to such a case, the specification of the gaming machine after changing the enclosure mark indicating the number of rounds and the range mark, the model name, and the explanatory sticker on which the jackpot occurrence probability is printed There is an advantage that the cover member 50B that was originally used can be reused by re-applying the authentication sticker at the same time as the sticker for explanation corresponding to the above.
Further, since the cover member 50B has a structure that can be removed from the game board, there is also an advantage that the sticker can be easily reattached.

FIG. 66 shows a second modification of the special-purpose display substrate (collective display device) 50 according to the third embodiment. This modification is a rubber that lowers the momentum of a game ball launched toward the game area 32 at the upper right of the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 or a game ball guide member having a guide surface 31a continuous therewith. An elastic body 31B is provided, and a spec sticker 54 on which a model name, a probability of occurrence of a big hit, etc. are printed is attached to the surface of the elastic body 31B.
In this modification, as shown in FIG. 63, the specification seal 54 on the surface of the elastic body 31B is also pasted when the cover plate 50A is turned over and replaced, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, there is an advantage that it is possible to prevent an attachment error of the cover plate 50A and it is not necessary to secure an area for displaying the specifications.

(Fourth embodiment)
Next, a fourth example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, a connection portion (female connector) 50C for electrical connection with the game control device 100 is provided on the back surface of the special figure display substrate (collective display device) 50. 68, a connection portion (male connector) 100C that is detachably coupled to the connection portion (female connector) is provided at a predetermined position on the control board 100A of the game control device 100. Then, when the game control device 100 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 30, when the game control device 100 is pushed in at a predetermined mounting position, as shown in FIG. The connection part (female connector) 50C and the connection part (male connector) 100C on the game control device 100 side are physically coupled to achieve electrical connection at the same time.
According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the special display board 50 and the game control device 100 can be easily electrically connected only by mounting the game control device 100 on the back surface of the game board 30. is there.

(5th Example)
Next, a fifth example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the special figure display substrate (collective display device) 50 is composed of one 7-segment type color display (LED lamp). Each of the segments a to h displays the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 start memory number (holding number), etc. by the change of the emission color. .
Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), characters explaining the contents displayed by each segment are displayed on the surface in the lower right corner of the game board 30 in the vicinity of the special figure display board 50. A printed explanation plate 56 is affixed.

The color display constituting the display board 50 of the special figure of this embodiment has a light emitting means composed of three LEDs, a red LED, a blue LED and a green LED, corresponding to the three primary colors of light. Full-color display is possible by providing light emitting means comprising a set of three LEDs for each of a to h.
Then, for example, the number of rounds at the time of the big hit game by segment a, the number of normal start memory by segment b, the special figure 1 start memory number by segment c, the special figure 2 variable display game by segment d, and the special figure by segment e. FIG. 2 shows the starting memory number, the segment f display game with the segment f, the special figure 1 variable display game with the segment g, and the game state with the segment h.

Further, the relationship between the emission color and display content in each segment is set as shown in FIG. 71, for example. According to the setting shown in FIG. 71, the segment a displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game is 2 rounds when lit in “blue” color, and 4 when lit in “yellow” color. When it is lit in “green” color, it is notified that it is 8 rounds, and when it is lit in “red” color, it is notified that it is 16 rounds.
In addition, the number of memorized start memories, the special figure 1 start memory number, and the special figure 2 start memory number by the segments b, c, e are “1” and “yellow” when the blue light is lit. The start memory number is “2” when lit in color, the start memory number is “3” when lit in “green” color, and the start memory number is “4” when lit in “red” color Is notified.

  In addition, in the segment d for displaying the special figure 2 variable display game and the segment g for displaying the special figure 1 variable display game, the "blue" color is repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined cycle during the fluctuation, that is, blinking is performed. To inform that it is changing. When the “blue” light is turned on and stopped, the game result is “out”, and when the “yellow” light is turned on and stopped, the “small hit” and “green” light are turned on and stopped. Then, when “normal big hit” and “red” light up and stop, it is notified that “probable big hit”. During the fluctuation, instead of blinking “blue”, any one of “yellow”, “green”, and “red” may be blinked, or these four colors may be circulated. A plurality of colors other than these four colors may be lit in a cyclic manner, or any other color than the above four colors and “blue” color may be alternately lit to indicate that the color is changing.

  The game for displaying variable figures in the segment f is unsuccessful when stopped in “blue” color, and wins when stopped in “yellow”, “green”, or “red” colors. 37 is opened. For example, in the case of “opening pattern 1”, opening of 0.99 seconds is executed 6 times. Further, in the case of “release pattern 2”, the release of 1.19 seconds is executed five times, and in the case of “release pattern 3”, the release of 1.99 seconds is executed three times. Note that the end of the open state of the normal variation winning device 37 ends when each open pattern ends or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won.

The segment h displaying the gaming state notifies that it is in the normal gaming state if it is “off”, and that it is in the electric support (general power support) state when it is lit in “red” color. In addition, when the segment h is lit in, for example, “blue”, it may be notified that it is in a probable variation (high probability) state.
Also, in the variable display game of special figure 1 or special figure 2, a probable big hit occurs, and after the big hit round game is finished, it shifts to a high probability state and is closed in a high probability state and the power is shut off. There is. In such a case, when the game control device determines that the game control device is in a high probability state when the power is turned on to start business the next day, the segment h for displaying the game state is lit in a light emission color different from the above. The high probability state may be notified.

The display contents of each segment are not limited to those shown in FIG. 71. For example, the number of special figure 1 starting memories is indicated by segment a, the figure 2 starting memory quantity is indicated by segment b, and the figure starting memory number is indicated by segment c. May be displayed respectively. As a result, when all the starting memory numbers become the maximum value (4), the segments a, b, and c emit light in the same color (for example, “red” color) as shown in FIG. Since the red “7” is displayed on the device, there is an advantage that it can be understood at a glance that the three types of start-up memories are full.
Special figure 1 start memory so as to display a symbol corresponding to a significant symbol such as “C” or “U” (a symbol such as alphabet, which is used daily) instead of “7”. The segment for displaying the number, the special figure 2 starting memory number, and the ordinary figure starting memory number may be selected.
In addition to the 7-segment color display, an LED lamp for production, an LED lamp for right-handed instruction, and the like may be provided in the vicinity of the color display.

FIG. 72 shows a modification of the fifth embodiment. In this modified example, an EL (electroluminescence) panel or a liquid crystal panel is used in place of the explanation plate 56 shown in FIG. 70A in the vicinity of the display board 50 such as a special figure and in the lower right corner of the game board 30. The sub-display 57 is arranged, and the sub-display 57 displays the contents explaining the contents to be displayed by each segment. The display content may be the same as that of the explanation plate 56 in FIG.
In addition, when such a sub-display 57 is provided, the display screen may be switched to a screen for displaying a detailed description as shown in FIG. The screen switching instruction may be given by operating the effect button 25 (see FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the effect control device 300 may be configured to switch the screen of the sub-display 57. it can.
The explanation display of the contents displayed by the segment is not limited to the sub-display 57 arranged at the lower right corner of the game board 30, and for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the display device 41 at the center of the game board 30 You may make it carry out in the subdisplay 58 arrange | positioned immediately above.

FIG. 75 shows another modification of the fifth embodiment. In this modification, instead of configuring the special figure display substrate (collective display device) 50 with one 7-segment type color display, a plurality of color LED lamps LED1 to LED8 are arranged side by side and displayed by segment. A cover plate 50A on which a description of the contents to be printed is placed.
The setting of display contents by each LED lamp can be the same as that shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 75, LED lamps having different shapes or sizes are arranged, and contents with a high degree of attention of the player are displayed with a large lamp, and contents with a low degree of attention of the player are displayed. It may be configured to display with a small lamp.

From the above description, in the above embodiment,
A collective display device (50) capable of displaying at least a special map variation display game and a start memory as a start condition of the special map variation display game;
A game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a special display variation display game is performed in the collective display device and a special display result is obtained,
A cover on the front surface of the collective display device (47) in which a portion of the display unit of the collective display device that is desired to be visible from the front is partially light-transmitted and an explanation related to the display of the collective display device It can be seen that the invention includes a member (50A, 50B) covered.

Here, the “special game state” means that the probability of occurrence of a special display result in the special figure variation display game is increased in addition to the big hit state in which the special variation winning device is established, which is generated by the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. It means a probability variation state (high probability state). In addition, the “light transmission state” means a state in which light from behind is partially transmitted by forming an opaque film or layer on the surface of a transparent member, or a portion of an opaque member. In other words, it is a state in which openings are formed.
According to the invention as described above, for example, as the game board is converted from a specification with a low probability of occurrence of a special display result to a specification with a high probability of occurrence of a special display result in a special figure variation display game, the display unit of the display device If you want to change the part that you want to be visible or the description related to the display on the display device, prepare a plurality of cover members with different contents and replace them with cover members that correspond to the specifications. be able to. That is, when changing the model, it is possible to easily change the description related to the display on the display device in accordance with the specifications of the new model.

In the above embodiment,
The cover member (50B) includes an invention in which a certificate sticking portion (50d) to which a certificate stamp can be attached is provided.
According to this invention, since it becomes easy to change the explanation relating to display on the display device and to exchange the certificate issued by the certification authority of the gaming machine, it is possible to quickly and surely convert to a gaming board with different specifications. .

In the above embodiment,
The cover member (50A) is printed with different contents on one surface and the other surface, and the cover member (50A) is placed on the front surface of the collective display device (50) with any surface corresponding to the specifications of the gaming machine as a table. An invention that can be used for two models by being attached is included.
According to this invention, when the game board is changed to a different specification, the explanation relating to the display of the display device can be changed by simply turning the cover member upside down. With this change, the number of parts to be discarded is reduced and the cost can be reduced.

In the above embodiment,
The collective display device (50) includes a plurality of 7-segment display units (special display indicators 51 and 52), and can execute a special map variable display game that displays the same variable display on the plurality of display units. Invented inventions are included.
According to this invention, for example, a gaming machine that executes a plurality of special figure variation games with different starting conditions, such as the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the first and second This makes it possible to share the parts of the collective display device with a gaming machine that executes a special figure variation display game without distinction between them, thereby reducing costs.

  FIG. 76 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 receives signals (start winning detection signals) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121a in the input section 120. An inversion circuit 112 composed of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator are provided to generate a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, power failure monitoring circuit and initialization switch, and the occurrence and recovery of power failure in game control device 100 A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal to be notified is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half variation pattern as a pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like is also input to the third input port 124. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 through the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured as follows. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 detects that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 125 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 includes a first output port 131 that is connected to the data bus 140 and generates a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 200 and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. The output unit 130 is provided with a buffer 132. This buffer 132 is arranged on the data communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300, and prevents the signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side, that is, one-way. This is to secure communication. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 to transmit data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312 and various melody and sound effects are reproduced from the speakers 19a and 19b. The sound source LSI 314 for controlling the sound output is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and a sound ROM 324 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the special figure reservation number command, the special figure command, the change command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are received as production control command signals. . Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the front frame 12. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41), a motor provided on the front frame 12 (for example, the moving device) A frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling the frame effect device 45 such as a motor that operates the light 16 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 that drive and control the lamp, motor, solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and an effect agent switch 44a for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44 are turned on. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the off state and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an amplifier circuit 337a that includes an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving a speaker 19b provided on the frame 12 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. DC32V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and speaker, and a reference for these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal start gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b or the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize opening solenoid 39b. The members 39c and 39c are opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 83 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 78, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs ( In step S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) is performed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Next, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S4), and an interrupt mode setting process (step S5) for setting an interrupt process mode is performed.

  Thereafter, processing for setting a power supply delay timer is performed (step S6). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and a command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch is reliably detected by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. it can. In other words, if the initialization switch state is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to do. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S6), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S7 to S11) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step S7), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S8).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S7 (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S9; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S9; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is awaited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc., by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S8; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S10), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S11). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S11; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S7). When the timer value is 0 (step S11; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S13).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the production control device 300 in this embodiment) is set (step S14), and the first input port read first is set. It is determined from the state of 122 whether the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 has been turned on (step S15).

  If the initialization switch is OFF (step S15; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S16). S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18). It is determined whether the checksums coincide with each other (step S19). If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the process proceeds to step S20 in FIG. 79, and processing is performed when normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S15; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25 in FIG. 79 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S20 of FIG. 79, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S20). The areas to be initialized here are areas related to a power failure recovery inspection area, a checksum area, and error fraud monitoring. Thereafter, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S21). If the probability is not high (step S21; N), steps S22 and S23 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, when the probability is high (step S21; Y), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S22), and the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on, for example. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S23). And the command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 (step S24), and it progresses to step S29.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S15, S16, S17, S19 to step S25, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S25), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S26), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S27). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S24 and the power-on command transmitted in step S28 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine and a decoration feature indicating the number of holds in FIGS. 1 includes a hold number command, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 80, the bit transposition pattern is a different bit arrangement (placement after bit transposition in the lower stage) by replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (placement before the upper stage bit transposition) in a predetermined order. ) Is a pattern that defines how to replace the data when it is stored. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), the interruption is permitted (step S32). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S33) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S33, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S34), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S35). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S35; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S34 (step S36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S36; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S36; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S37), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S38) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step S39), and the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step S40). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S41) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S42), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S43) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when power is turned on again.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 81 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S18 and S41) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not ended (step S57: N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57: Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 82 shows the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the big hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step S61). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is a symbol that determines the big hit symbol stop value of the special figure 2 It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 83 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing (step S102) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to capture signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 The magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave, and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 are performed. . Then, external information editing processing (step S113) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S114), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S101 (step S115), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S115) Step S116) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S102) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. . Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. The input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (step S150), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152), and the logic between the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the time of the previous interrupt The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken, and saved as a rising edge (step S155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 86, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 76) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). In step S164, the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step S167).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded and combined and output to the external information output port 137 (step S168). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S169). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S170).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S171). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S172). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S173) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in the payout command transmission process, first, a check is made among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls). It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the targeted winning number counter area (step S181). If there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers in all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the winning number counter area A payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, a strobe off timer for measuring the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether the data reading is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S186), and is acquired in step S185. The payout command (negative logic data) and the off-state (low level) strobe signal are output to the port 131 (see FIG. 76) (step S187).

  Thereafter, the strobe off timer is updated by -1 (step S188), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in step S186 has elapsed (step S189). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (step S189; N), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S187. If the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (step S189; Y), that is, if the off time has elapsed, a negative logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of negative logic data is set. Setting is made (step S190).

  Next, a payout command (negative logic data) is output, and an on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S191). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by −1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has expired ( Step S193). When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S193; N), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to step S191. When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S193; Y), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data is ended, the negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic payout command is inverted. Data is generated (step S194).

  Next, a strobe on remaining timer for measuring the remaining strobe signal on time (high level time, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S195), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S194 is set. The strobe signal in the on state (high level) is output to the port 131 (step S196). Thereafter, the remaining strobe-on timer is updated by -1 (step S197), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining strobe-on timer is 0, that is, whether the on-time set in step S195 has expired (step S198). If the value of the remaining strobe on timer is not 0 (step S198; N), that is, if the on-time has not expired, the process returns to step S196. Further, when the value of the remaining strobe on timer is 0 (step S198; Y), that is, when the on-time has expired, a positive logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of the positive logic data. Is set (step S199).

  Thereafter, a payout command (positive logic data) is output, and an off state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S200). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S201), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in step S199 has ended (step S201). Step S202). If the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S202; N), that is, if the output time has not ended, the process returns to step S200. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S202; Y), that is, when it is finished, information regarding the number of payout balls scheduled to be sent from the game control device 100 to the external device is set. The main winning ball remaining number update process (step S203) is performed, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 pays out the game ball based on this payout command. As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. By making a request to the game control apparatus 100, it becomes possible to receive an accurate command.

[Main prize ball remaining number update processing]
Next, details of the main winning ball remaining number update process (step S203) in the above-described payout command transmission process will be described. In this main award ball remaining number update process, a main award ball signal to be output to an external device is set every time the number of award balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). To do. In addition to the main prize ball signal, an external apparatus outputs a prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the main winning ball remaining number update process, first, the value of the remaining winning ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S211). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not reach a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. In this process, the value of the remaining prize ball area is stored. The value of a positive logic payout command is added as the number of payouts of newly generated prize balls. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S212).

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S213), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214). When the subtraction result is not equal to or greater than 0 (step S214; N), the main winning ball remaining number update process is terminated. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S215), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S215). S216), the process returns to step S213.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 89 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 83). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random number 1, and jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). In addition, when the normal hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Y), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal number is next time. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S226). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

  When the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 90 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 83). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the R register with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S236). S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
FIG. 91 shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 83). In this winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, a detection signal from a count switch) corresponding to one lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38). (The data indicating the number of the input port, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc. is stored) is prepared (step S301). Next, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (the first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and normal. A fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a prize is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S305), and an illegal winning is monitored and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (start opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S307), and the illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S308) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S309), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S310) is performed.

  Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). Thereafter, according to the value of the error scan counter, any one of the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, the chute ball switch signal from the dispensing control device 200, the overflow switch signal, and the dispensing abnormality status signal The gaming machine error monitoring table 1 for setting the error monitoring based on the target is prepared (step S312). Then, an error check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314; Y), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no error monitoring target in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is not 3 (step S314; N), the glass frame open detection switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64, the disconnection of the connector of the switch, etc. are generated according to the value of the error scan counter. A gaming machine error monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the output abnormality detection signals 2 is prepared (step S315). Then, an error check process (step S316) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed, and the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 92 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-described prize opening switch / error monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to cheat by opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the lower count switch 38a. In the case of the upper count switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step S325).

  The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  If the determined number is not exceeded (step S325; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of determinations is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 93 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S310 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357). If there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step S354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S352). S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area (step S356), and it is determined whether all switches have been monitored (step S357). If an overflow has occurred (step S355; Y), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S357).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S357; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S357; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Command setting processing]
FIG. 94 shows the command setting process (step S342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

  If a command is being transmitted (step S363; Y), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; N), the transmission circuit is initialized because the circuit may be abnormal (step S364), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer ( After step S365), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

  Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Y), the command setting process is terminated. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; N), the circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, it is not necessary to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that the command may be transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication.

[Error check processing]
FIG. 95 shows the error check process (steps S313 and S316) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process. In this error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to the error scan counter is acquired (step S381), and it is determined whether the switch (including the signal) to be monitored is on, that is, whether it is in a state indicating an error. Determination is made (step S382).

  If the switch is not on (step S382: N), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step S383), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step S384). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S385), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S389).

  On the other hand, if the switch is on (step S382: Y), an error flag is prepared as an error flag (step S386), and a target error notification command is prepared (step S387). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S388), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S389).

  If the value of the target switch control area matches the current switch state (step S389; Y), that is, if the switch state has not changed, the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S392). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393). If the value of the target switch control area does not match the current switch state (step S389; N), that is, if the switch state changes, the current switch state is saved in the target switch control area ( In step S390), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S391), the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S392), and the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value. Is determined (step S393).

  If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393; N), the error check process is terminated. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393: Y), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S394). The error flag is compared with the value in the target error flag area (step S395).

  If the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step S395; Y), the error check process is terminated. If the set error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (step S395; N), the prepared error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S396), and command setting processing is performed. (Step S397), the error check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 or the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the special figure game process number referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch process ends is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed.

  In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit or a big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a big prize winning ball remaining ball process A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A17) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A19) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not 0 in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A16 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (start winning port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A115, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A114).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A114 that there is no fraud in ordinary power transmission (step A114; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A115), The starting port switch common process (step A116) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A114; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the special figure start port switch common processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A201). If there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A201; Y), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Y), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step A204).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal which is the number of times information related to the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output count is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Y), the process proceeds to step A209.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A209). If the special figure hold number is less than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure hold number to be updated (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated by 1 (step A212), and is monitored. The decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of special figure hold corresponding to the monitoring start switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step A220) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. In addition, the start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure hold is not less than the upper limit (step A209; N), a special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step A210) and command setting processing (step A211) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 99, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are satisfied (step A231). If not satisfied (step A231; N), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step A231; Y), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.

  Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In addition, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, when the open extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation, This is a case where it is not in a state, and a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).

  In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step A231; Y), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step A232) is performed to determine whether or not. If the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is set. A pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; N), a stoppage stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (step A237).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and command setting processing is performed (step A239). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A240) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starter switch (step A240). A241), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

  Then, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and command setting processing is performed ( Step A244), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, is the big prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38 or second special variable prize winning device 39) open, that is, in a special gaming state? Is determined (step A251). If the big prize opening is not open (step A251; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the big prize opening is open (step A251; Y), 0 is set to the prize counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening that is added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether it is in a special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (Step A253).

  When the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A253; Y), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (step A254). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A254; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 38a) (step A255).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step A255; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A257). Then, a command setting process (step A258) is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

  If there is no input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (step A259; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (step A259; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A261). Then, command setting processing (step A262) is performed, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

  On the other hand, when the lower major prize opening is not open (step A253; N), that is, the upper major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (special game that opens the second special variable prize winning device 39). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the top prize winning opening switch (step A263; Y), it is determined whether the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A264).

  When it is not in the process of remaining the winning prize remaining ball (step A264; N), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and an upper winning prize count command is prepared (step A266). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264; Y), an upper winning ticket count command is prepared (step A266). Thereafter, command setting processing (step A267) is performed to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of big winning mouth counts (step A269), and the number of big winning mouth counts is the upper limit (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of possible game balls has been exceeded (step A270).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; N), the big winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; Y), the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step A274), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17 and A19) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 101, in the symbol fluctuation control process, first, the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure. Is checked (step A281).

  If the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step S282). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the flashing control timer according to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; N), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A288). If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Y), the blinking control timer initial value is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first and second special figures are saved. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A289). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. It becomes.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step A306). If it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step A311; N) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), a command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). The normal process transition setting process 1 ends.

  Returning to FIG. 102, in step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the updated special figure 2 hold number after -1 update is prepared ( Step A302) and command setting processing (step A303) are performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. In step A306, if the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A306; N), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after the -1 update is prepared (step A307). Then, command setting processing (step A308) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (steps A307 and A302), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 112) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Step A441).

  In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check, and if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is executed. Will be. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 104, first, the special figure fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 105 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A342). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A343) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is a big hit (step A344; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A343) is not a big hit (step A344; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while saving the deviation information to the big hit flag 1.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 106 shows the big hit determination process (step A343) in the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability state is present (step A353).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A353; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). If not in the high probability state (step A353; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A357), and the big hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; N), that is, if the big hit is, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A358), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 107 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A367). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A368), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. Save in the information area (step A369). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A361; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A370). A371), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A373), and command setting processing (step A374) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in short time (short time state) (step A381). If it is not in the special drawing time (step A381; N), the normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step A382). If the special drawing time is short (step A381; Y), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step A383).

  Then, the number of special figure hold corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded (step A384), the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). . Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of start memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the state is saved is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the production mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). If the production mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394). If the stop symbol pattern is not a slippage stop symbol pattern (step A394; N). ) Loads the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepares it (step A397).

  On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Y), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A394; Y), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step A392. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step A396), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A397).

  When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step A400). Then, a sorting process (step A401) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A403), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A406). ). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 110 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step A398) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code with no sorting (step A412; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A417) and end the 2-byte sorting process. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; N), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A413).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A413 from the random value loaded in Step A397 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A414). It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A415; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process proceeds to step A413 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step A413, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random value as the new random value in step A415, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A415 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A415 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A415; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 111 shows the sorting process (steps A401 and A407) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step A421). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step A422; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A427), and the sorting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step A423).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A423 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 2 or the variation pattern random number 3) loaded in step A400 or A406, a new random value is calculated ( In step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A425; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process proceeds to step A423, and the subsequent steps Process.

  That is, in step A423, after the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step A425. Further, a new random value is calculated (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step A425 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A425; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A427), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 112, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A435).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A436), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A438), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A439), and command setting processing is performed (step A440). . Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step A443), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (Step A444).

  Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). When the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step A446; Y), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Y), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. In (Step A448; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (Step A449).

  If the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; N), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). A command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). If the special figure high probability is present (step A449; Y), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S451). A452), a command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the change start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extended display time 2 (second extended stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step A446; N), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; N), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; N) ends the change start information setting process. In this case, the stop time extension is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. It has come to be. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 113, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processing (step A464, see FIG. 108) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step A465). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see Step A466, FIG. 109) for setting a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (See step A467, FIG. 112), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 114 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 105 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A471). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A472). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (see step A473, see FIG. 106) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is a big hit (step A474; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A473) is not a big hit (step A474; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 115 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this processing, the same processing as that in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 107 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A487). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Furthermore, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A488), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A489). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

  On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A481; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region (step A490). A491), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A493), and command setting processing (step A494) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A496). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 116 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 102). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 117 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process (see FIG. 102). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 118, in the special figure changing process, it is first determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). If there is no stop extension information (step A601; N), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606). To complete the special figure display process.

  If there is stop extension information (step A601; Y), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). If it is the stop extension information 1 (step A603; Y), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step S604) A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not stop extension information 1 (step A603; N), that is, when it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605), The special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 119 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A606) in the special figure fluctuation mid-process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613, A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output is determined in the external information terminal A control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the count signal control timer area (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A621), and the RWM big hit flag 2 is loaded. A process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623). If it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A623; Y), the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A628), and the second special A test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A623; N) as a result of the check, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (Step A625). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A626). If it is determined that the big hit flag is a big hit (step A626; Y), the big hit (first figure big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A test signal related to the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step A633), and a command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and a command setting process ( Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638). )I do.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A640). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening corresponding to the winning prize opening opening information (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39) is cleared (step A641), and the special winning opening is opened. A fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the information (step A642).

  Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A644). Thereby, the information on the production mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later. Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit at step A626 in FIG. 120 (step A626; N), a special mode variation display for setting a short time state is performed by performing a production mode information check process (step A646) regarding the setting of the production mode. Time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A647) for managing the number of game executions is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A648, see FIG. 103) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A645) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 121, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A651) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). . Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), and the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A656). Save the low probability of ordinary figure & no ordinary power support flag in the flag area (step A657).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A659), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661), and a special figure variation display that can be executed in a short time state. The time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A662). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A671; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A671; N), the effect remaining rotational speed, which is the number of times that the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become 0 (step A673). When the remaining effect rotation speed becomes 0 (step A673; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step A675).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S676). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), command setting processing (step A681) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step A673; N), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether there is any (step A682). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Y), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), command setting processing (step A684) is performed, and effect mode information check processing is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number update process (step A647) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 123, in the time shortening variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is being reached (step A691). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A691; Y), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A691; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is short (time short state) (step A692).

  If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A692; N), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step A692; Y), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time shortening variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time shortening variation number is not 0 (step A694; N), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated. If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A694; Y), that is, if the time-short state ends in this special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step A695), Command setting processing (step A696) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time shortening variation number update process is ended.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
FIG. 124 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step A697) in the above-described time-reduced variation frequency update process. In this special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction), first, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

  Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A704). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A706). The normal process transition setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is terminated.

  Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing patterns of the special prize opening (special variable prize device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation are 2, 11, 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. This is a special result that is considered to be a short time. In addition, 11R normally has 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). It is a special result that is in a short time until execution.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a lower grand prize opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) and an upper large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), each having a plurality of opening / closing patterns. . One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening and closing patterns, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

  FIG. 125 shows an open / close pattern of the upper university winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 125 (a) is selected when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the time-saving state. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval time of 1448 ms is interposed. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b) is selected when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing manner as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern, but has an ending time of 1400 ms. The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 125 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the round in which the opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with the interval time of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state is ended.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 125 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and it is difficult to recognize which opening / closing pattern the player has as the same effect on the display device 41 or the like. Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 during the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 125 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  FIG. 126 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower grand prize opening (first special variable winning device 38). The lower grand prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 126 (a) is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal. In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, and then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval time of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 126 (b) is selected in correspondence with some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 3 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The lower grand prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 126 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 2 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 at an interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the open / close pattern is 1 to 3 (step A752).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; Y), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set. Value)) (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table. In the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. The round command corresponding to the number is not transmitted. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; N), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and command setting processing is performed. (Step A754) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755). If it is the first round (step A755; Y), the big prize opening information is the lower special prize opening (first special prize) It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 38) is an open / close pattern (step A756). If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A756; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set (step A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

  When the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Y), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper prize opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG. Further, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; N), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step A761), the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; N), it is determined whether the started round is 2-11 rounds (step A762), and the started rounds are 2-11. If it is round (step A762; Y), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A763). Then, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the lower winning opening / closing pattern are set (step A763; N). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step A763; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step S763). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; N), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the special prize opening information is the upper prize opening / closing pattern (step A766; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper prize opening / closing pattern are set (step S766). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper big opening / closing pattern (step A766; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening information is the lower big opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

  If the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round and after of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step A769) and the process proceeds to Step A770 in FIG.

  In step A770 of FIG. 128, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer area (step A770), and the set end value (E) of the control pointer is saved in the big hit middle control pointer upper limit area. Save (Step A771). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773).

  When the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step A773; Y), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. Further, when the special prize opening information is not the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern (Step A773; N), the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (Step A775), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. Through the above processing, one of the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 125 and 126 is set.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 129 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, output data is acquired, saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), opening / closing time value is acquired and special figure game process timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting process is terminated. To do. With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 130 shows a process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A774). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information of the big winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step A794). . Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (step A795), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 131 shows the process of setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A775). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 801), and the processing number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A802). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the top prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and information in the big winning count area storing the number of winning prizes in the big winning prize is cleared (step A804). . Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth distinguishing flag area (step A805), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 132, in the big prize opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A811). Step A812).

  When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; N), solenoid information setting processing (step A819, see FIG. 129) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, a process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed 3 (step A820), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended. As shown in FIG. 134, in the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A841), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. Save (step A842), and finish the process transition setting process 3 during the special winning opening opening.

  Returning to FIG. 132, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step A812; Y), the big winning opening release information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (upper winning opening opening pattern 1). -3) is determined (step A813). If the big prize opening information is the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; Y), the big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the process for opening the big prize opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and no interval command or ending command is transmitted.

  In addition, when the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step A813; N), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM, Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A814). If it is not the final round (step A814; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A815), command setting processing (step A817) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting processing ( Step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is terminated. If it is the final round (step A814; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A816), and the command setting process (step A817) is performed. Then, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 133 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A818) in the above-described special winning opening open process. In this special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, off data for turning off the large winning port solenoid 38b or 39b is used as the large winning port solenoid. The data is saved in the output data area (step A834), and the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 135, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A851; N), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special prize opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step A852). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated. The interval time is set to a time corresponding to the current round number and the special winning opening opening information (for example, 68 ms for the upper winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A851; Y), the game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. (Step A854). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A855), and the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A856) is performed, and the big winning prize remaining ball End the process.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22400 ms, including 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period. Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 1400 ms in combination with 1380 ms spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 136 shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A853) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A861), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A861). A862).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is opened. A signal relating to the end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 137 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A856) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening completion of the lower university winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is ended. Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A875), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step A880). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step A881), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 138, in this jackpot ending process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the current special gaming state is set to a high probability after the special gaming state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

  If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). ), A probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and a command setting process (step A905) is performed.

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, with reference to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step A907). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A908), and the next mode transition to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).

  Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and command setting processing (step A912) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 139 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A923), and the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (short time) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the initial value (eg, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the big hit ends The setting process 1 ends.

  By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 140 shows jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

  Next, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.

  That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
FIG. 141 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information of the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is a short time number. Is saved (step A947). Then, a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A948), and a fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period flag area is saved (step A949). The normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 142, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).

  If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

  In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether or not the time reduction state is in progress, A general map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map process is performed. In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure. If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.

  Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B16) ) To complete the usual game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 143, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than the upper limit (step B102).

  When the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved maps is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved maps is calculated. (Step B104). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 144, in the general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is being executed a predetermined number of times when the normal fluctuation winning game is in a hit state. It is determined whether there is any (step B121). Then, when it is normal (step B121; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Y). If it is determined, the count of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit (for example, 9) (step B124), and it is determined that the count has reached the upper limit (step B124; Y). Then, the pointer (the value at which the hit ends) is loaded from the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal hit (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step B126), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the map is not being hit (step B121; N), if it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; N), or step B124. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B124; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure usual process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, in the usual-day routine processing, first, it is determined whether the number of pending drawings is 0 (step B131). If the number of reserved drawings is 0 (step B131; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. In addition, when the usual figure hold number is not 0 (step B131; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM common figure random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step B132), and the usual figure change display game is executed. It is determined whether the probability of the hit result is a normal high probability that is higher than usual, that is, whether the time is short (step B133).

  When it is not the time of the normal high probability (step B133; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of the normal low probability (step B134). If the value of the winning random number does not match the low probability determination value (step B134; N), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step B135). B136), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Y), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step B149).

  In step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Y), the high probability lower limit determination in which the value of the hit random number is a lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used at the time of the normal probability. If the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; N), a plurality of consecutive determinations to be used when the hit random number value is normally high probability It is determined whether the value is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value (step B138).

  If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step B138; N), that is, if it is a win, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol is hit by the normal stop symbol A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value at Step B137 (Step B137; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value at Step B138 (Step B138; Y ), That is, in the case of a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the usual figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per ordinary figure (holding number 1) Is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

  After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per usual figure to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.

  After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, it is determined whether the power transmission support is in progress (during the short-time state) (step B148). If the power transmission support is not in progress (step B148; N), the fluctuation time when there is no power transmission support (for example, 10 seconds) ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B148; Y), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B150). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B151) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition process 1]
FIG. 146 shows the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the normal figure normal process described above. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B161). B162). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 147 shows the process transition setting process (step B151) during the usual figure change in the usual figure usual process described above. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B171). Step B172). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and a changing flag indicating that the normal figure change display game is changing is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B175), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (step B10) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 148 (a), in the process for changing the normal map, the process for setting the process for changing the normal map display (step B180) is performed. As shown in FIG. 148 (b), in the general diagram display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for transitioning to the general map display process (step B181). Is saved in the usual game process number area (step B182). After that, a general map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) that is a display time of the result of the general map change display game on the general map display is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is set as the general game display process. Save in the timer area (step B184). Further, a signal related to the end of the normal change is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and a stop flag indicating that the normal change display game is stopped is saved in the normal change control flag area ( In step B186), the normal diagram display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 149, in the normal map display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or missed information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B201), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B202), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step B203).

  When the hit flag is not hit information (step B203; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal / normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Y), it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is being performed (during the time saving state) (step B204).

  If the normal power support is not in progress (step B204; N), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B205). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved. Save in the upper limit area of control pointer per figure (step B207). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the power transmission support is in progress (step B204; Y), the power transmission release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of power transmission support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal call (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 150 shows a process for setting a process for transition to a normal map in the process for displaying a normal map (step B211). In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B221), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B222). After that, a signal related to the hitting of the normal map display game and a signal related to the start of the normal operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the general electric signal is output to drive (turn on) the general electric solenoid. On data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

  Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period. The information on the winning number area is cleared (step B226). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the process for the normal map, first, the control pointer for the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded control pointer for the normal map is set to the control for the normal map. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value area (the value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B302; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B303), A general electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B302; Y), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B303. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed, and the normal hit process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 152 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-described normal process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 3, 5, or 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after closing (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B312), and the off data is set in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B313), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1, 4, 6, or 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is used to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. On data is set in the data area (step B315), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9, the process goes to step B316 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13). Then, “4” is set as the process number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B317), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B318). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B319), and the general electric operation transition setting process is ended.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 153 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an ordinary process end process shift setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), in the universal figure end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the universal figure end process is set (step B401), and the process number is designated as the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B402).

  Thereafter, the ordinary ending time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B403), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data region (step B404). The normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to 37 is cleared (step B405). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the normal control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the normal figure end process transition setting process ends.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, a process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B502).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and a flag for specifying the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is monitored. Save in the period flag area (step B504), and the usual process transition setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which a display mode on the general map hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the general map hold number is displayed. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the usual figure hold display (step S502). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step S503), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. The data is saved in the segment area of the container (step S504).

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step S505), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 hold indicator. Are saved in the segment area (step S506). Furthermore, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), and display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display unit ( Step S508).

  Next, a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 are defined is set (step S509), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. Are saved in the segment area of each game state display section (step S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery (step S511). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step S511; Y), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; N), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. To do.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 156, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step S603).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is set. Save in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. Is updated by -1 if the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the values do not match (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), command setting processing is performed (step S615), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the radio wave is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 (step S701). S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706).

  When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step S707), a radio fraud cancel flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step S708), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag area. (Step S709).

  If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step S709; N), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S104), the prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112). Then, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the external information editing process, first, a main opening ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting information related to the number of winning balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal for editing a starting port winning signal. Edit processing (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not 0, -1 is updated (step S803). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (step S804).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (step S804; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S805). On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (step S804; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). Thereafter, processing for setting information according to the error state and the security state is performed.

  In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, first, a security signal for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error status signal Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, a glass frame open error is occurring (step S809; Y), and the front frame An open error is occurring (step S810; Y), a lower prize winning fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), an upper winning prize fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), and an ordinary electric power fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Y) or radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error state The signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is terminated. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; N), the off-data of the security signal is used as external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  As shown in FIG. 159, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step S823; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The control timer initial value is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step S823; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S823). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; N), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S826; Y), the process proceeds to step S827. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S826; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). If the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step S833).

  If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step S833; N), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step S834), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S838), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Although the invention made by the present inventor has been specifically described based on the embodiments, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect.
Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment, and for example, a gaming machine or medal using a gaming ball such as an arrangement ball gaming machine or a sparrow ball gaming machine. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a used slot machine, and can be applied to a case where a plurality of movable decorative members are provided on the front side of a display device provided in each gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 Start winning opening 38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 40 Base member 40a Armor part 40c Cover member 41 Liquid crystal display device (display device)
45A, 45B Production symbol display (during display means)
47 Front decoration member 48A, 48B Movable decoration member 49A, 49B Cover member 50 Collective display device (special drawing display board)
50A Cover plate (cover member)
50B Cover member 50d Certificate sticking part 51 Special figure 1 display (special symbol display device, special figure fluctuation display game display part)
52 Special Figure 2 Display (Special Symbol Display Device, Special Figure Change Display Game Display Unit)
100 Game control device 111B ROM (program storage means)
111C RAM (starting memory holding means)
300 Production control device (control means)
BS passing ball detecting means Ld Light emitting member

Claims (3)

A plurality of movable decorative members configured to be movable on the front side of the display device and capable of forming one significant shape by gathering at least each predetermined portion in one place;
A covering member capable of covering the front of the gap generated between adjacent portions of each movable decorative member in a state where the predetermined portions of the plurality of movable decorative members are gathered in one place,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable decorative member and the operation of the covering member ,
The control means includes
A state in which the movable decorative members are gathered in the display device can be displayed by an image,
A game machine characterized in that an image display in a state in which the movable decorative members are gathered on the display device and a control for operating the intermediate covering member can be linked . The movable decorative member is configured to be movable in parallel with the display screen of the display device,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the intermediate covering member is configured to be movable in an arc shape in the front-rear direction of the display device. The display device can execute a variable display game that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner,
The variation in the display means capable of performing display in variation indicating that at least the variable display game is running, the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that it comprises a display screen outside of said display device .

Images